You are on page 1of 324

CEBM012700

Shop
Manual

WB140-2N
WB150-2N
BACKHOE LOADER

WB140-2N A20637
SERIAL NUMBERS and UP
WB150-2N A60029

This material is proprietary to Komatsu America Corp. and is not to be reproduced, used, or disclosed except in accordance
with written authorization from Komatsu America Corp.

It is our policy to improve our products whenever it is possible and practical to do so. We reserve the right to make changes or
add improvements at any time without incurring any obligation to install such changes on products sold previously.

Due to this continuous program of research and development, periodic revisions may be made to this publication. It is recom-
mended that customers contact their distributor for information on the latest revision.

August 2005 Copyright 2005 Komatsu


Printed in USA DataKom Publishing Division
WB140-2N WB150-2N 00-1
FOREWORD CONTENTS
12
CONTENTS 00

01 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-1

10 STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND MAINTENANCE STANDARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

20 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1

30 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Will be issued at a later date

90 OTHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-1

00-2 WB140-2N WB150-2N


FOREWORD SAFETY
12
SAFETY 00

SAFETY NOTICE 00

IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE 00

Proper service and repair is extremely important for the safe operation of your machine. The service and repair techniques
recommended and described in this manual are both effective and safe methods of operation. Some of these operations
require the use of tools specially designed for the purpose.

To prevent injury to workers, the symbols and are used to mark safety precautions in this manual. The cautions accom-
panying these symbols should always be followed carefully. If any dangerous situation arises or may possibly arise, first con-
sider safety, and take the necessary actions to deal with the situation.

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS 00 PREPARATIONS FOR WORK 00

Mistakes in operation are extremely dangerous. Read the 1. Before adding oil or making repairs, park the machine
OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL carefully on hard, level ground, and block the wheels or tracks to
BEFORE operating the machine. prevent the machine from moving.

1. Before carrying out any greasing or repairs, read all the 2. Before starting work, lower blade, ripper, bucket or any
precautions given on the decals which are fixed to the other work equipment to the ground. If this is not possi-
machine. ble, insert the safety pin or use blocks to prevent the
work equipment from falling. In addition, be sure to
2. When carrying out any operation, always wear safety lock all the control levers and hang warning signs on
shoes and helmet. Do not wear loose work clothes, or them.
clothes with buttons missing.
Always wear safety glasses when hitting parts with a 3. When disassembling or assembling, support the
hammer. machine with blocks, jacks or stands before starting
Always wear safety glasses when grinding parts with a work.
grinder, etc.
4. Remove all mud and oil from the steps or other places
used to get on and off the machine. Always use the
3. If welding repairs are needed, always have a trained,
handrails, ladders or steps when getting on or off the
experienced welder carry out the work. When carrying
machine. Never jump on or off the machine. If it is
out welding work, always wear welding gloves, apron,
impossible to use the handrails, ladders or steps, use a
glasses, cap and other clothes suited for welding work.
stand to provide safe footing.
4. When carrying out any operation with two or more
workers, always agree on the operating procedure PRECAUTIONS DURING WORK 00

before starting. Always inform your fellow workers 1. When removing the oil filler cap, drain plug or hydrau-
before starting any step of the operation. Before starting lic pressure measuring plugs, loosen them slowly to pre-
work, hang UNDER REPAIR signs on the controls in vent the oil from spurting out. Before disconnecting or
the operator's compartment. removing components of the oil, water or air circuits,
first remove the pressure completely from the circuit.
5. Keep all tools in good condition and learn the correct
way to use them. 2. The water and oil in the circuits are hot when the engine
is stopped, so be careful not to get burned. Wait for the
6. Decide a place in the repair workshop to keep tools and oil and water to cool before carrying out any work on
removed parts. Always keep the tools and parts in their the oil or water circuits.
correct places. Always keep the work area clean and
make sure that there is no dirt or oil on the floor. Smoke 3. Before starting work, remove the leads from the battery.
only in the areas provided for smoking. Never smoke ALWAYS remove the lead from the negative (-) termi-
while working. nal first.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 00-3


FOREWORD SAFETY
12
4. When raising heavy components, use a hoist or crane. Check that the wire rope, chains and hooks are free from damage.
Always use lifting equipment which has ample capacity. Install the lifting equipment at the correct places. Use a hoist or
crane and operate slowly to prevent the component from hitting any other part. Do not work with any part still raised by
the hoist or crane.

5. When removing covers which are under internal pressure or under pressure from a spring, always leave two bolts in posi-
tion on opposite sides. Slowly release the pressure, then slowly loosen the bolts to remove.

6. When removing components, be careful not to break or damage the wiring, Damaged wiring may cause electrical fires.

7. When removing piping, stop the fuel or oil from spilling out. If any fuel or oil drips on to the floor, wipe it up immediately.
Fuel or oil on the floor can cause you to slip, or can even start fires.

8. Gasoline or other fuels should never be used to clean parts. Clean part with appropriate solvents.

9. Be sure to assemble all parts again in their original places. Replace any damaged part with new parts.
When installing hoses and wires, be sure that they will not be damaged by contact with other parts when the machine is
being operated.

10. When installing high pressure hoses, make sure that they are not twisted. Damaged tubes are dangerous, so be extremely
careful when installing tubes for high pressure circuits. Also check that connecting parts are correctly installed.

11. When assembling or installing parts, always use the specified tightening torques. When installing protective parts such as
guards, or parts which vibrate violently or rotate at high speed, be particularly careful to check that they are installed cor-
rectly.

12. When aligning two holes, never insert your fingers or hand. Be careful not to get your fingers caught in a hole.

13. When measuring hydraulic pressure, check that the measuring tool is correctly assembled before taking any measure-
ments.

14. Take care when removing or installing the tracks of track-type machines. When removing the track, the track separates
suddenly, so never let anyone stand at either end of the track.

15. When jump starting the machine, only use a machine of similar size and voltage. Never use a arc welder or other electrical
generating equipment to jump start the machine. Carefully review the safety and procedures for jump starting the
machine.

00-4 WB140-2N WB150-2N


FOREWORD GENERAL
12
GENERAL 00

This shop manual has been prepared as an aid to improve the quality of repairs by giving the serviceman an accurate under-
standing of the product and by showing him the correct way to perform repairs and make judgements. Make sure you under-
stand the contents of this manual and use it to full effect at every opportunity.

This shop manual mainly contains the necessary technical information for operations performed in a service workshop. For
ease of understanding, the manual is divided into the following sections. These sections are further divided into each main
group of components.

GENERAL

This section lists the general machine dimensions, performance specifications, component weights, and fuel, coolant and
lubricant specification charts.

STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND MAINTENANCE STANDARD

This section explains the structure and function of each component. It serves not only to give an understanding of the
structure, but also serves as reference material for troubleshooting.

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING

This section explains checks to be made before and after performing repairs, as well as adjustments to be made at comple-
tion of the checks and repairs. Troubleshooting charts correlating Problems to Causes are also included in this section.

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

This section explains the order to be followed when removing, installing, disassembling or assembling each component,
as well as precautions to be taken for these operations.

NOTICE

The specifications contained in this shop manual are subject to change at any time and without any advance notice. Contact
your distributor for the latest information.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 00-5


FOREWORD HOW TO READ THE SHOP MANUAL
12
HOW TO READ THE SHOP MANUAL 00

VOLUMES 00 REVISIONS 00

Shop manuals are issued as a guide to carrying out repairs. Revised pages are shown at the LIST OF REVISED PAGES
They are divided as follows: between the title page and SAFETY page.

Chassis volume: Issued for every machine model SYMBOLS 00

Engine volume: Issued for each engine series


So that the shop manual can be of ample practical use,
Electrical volume: Each issued as one to cover all models important places for safety and quality are marked with the
Attachment volume: Each issued as one to cover all models following symbols.

These various volumes are designed to avoid duplication of


information. Therefore to deal with all repairs for any model, Symbol Item Remarks
it is necessary that chassis, engine, electrical and attachment Special safety precautions are
be available. Safety necessary when performing the
work.
DISTRIBUTION AND UPDATING 00

Special technical precautions or


other precautions for preserving
Any additions, amendments or other changes will be sent to Caution
standards are necessary when
your distributors. Get the most up-to-date information before
performing the work.
you start any work.
Weight of parts or systems. Cau-
FILING METHOD 00

Weight
tion necessary when selecting
hoisting wire or when working
1. See the page number on the bottom of the page. File the posture is important, etc.
pages in correct order. Places that require special atten-
2. Following examples show how to read the page number: Tightening
tion for tightening torque during
Example: torque
assembly.

10 - 3 Places to be coated with adhe-


Coat
sives and lubricants etc.
Item number (10. Structure and Function)
Places where oil, water or fuel
Oil, water
Consecutive page number for each item must be added, and the capacity.
Places where oil or water must
3. Additional pages: Additional pages are indicated by a Drain be drained, and quantity to be
hyphen (-) and numbered after the page number. File as drained.
in the example.
Example:
10-4
10-4-1
Added pages
10-4-2

10-5

REVISED EDITION MARK 00

When a manual is revised, an edition mark (bcd) is


recorded on the bottom outside corner of the pages.

00-6 WB140-2N WB150-2N


FOREWORD HOISTING INSTRUCTIONS
12
HOISTING INSTRUCTIONS 00

HOISTING 00
can result. Hooks have maximum strength at the middle
portion.
WARNING! Heavy parts (25 kg or more)
must be lifted with a hoist etc.
In the DISASSEMBLY AND
ASSEMBLY section, every
part weighing 25 kg or more is
indicated clearly with the sym-
bol.

If a part cannot be smoothly removed from the machine


by hoisting, the following checks should be made: 3. Do not sling a heavy load with one rope alone, but sling
1. Check for removal of all bolts fastening the part to the with two or more ropes symmetrically wound on to the
relative parts. load.
2. Check for existence of another part causing interface
with the part to be removed. WARNING! Slinging with one rope may
cause turning of the load dur-
ing hoisting, untwisting of the
WIRE ROPES 00

rope, or slipping of the rope


from its original winding posi-
1. Use adequate ropes depending on the weight of parts to tion on the load, which can
be hoisted, referring to the table below: result in a dangerous accident
Wire ropes
4. Do not sling a heavy load with ropes forming a wide
(Standard Z or S twist ropes without galvanizing)
hanging angle from the hook. When hoisting a load with
Rope diameter Allowable load two or more ropes, the force subjected to each rope will
increase with the hanging angles. The table below
mm kN tons
shows the variation of allowable load (kg) when hoist-
10 9.8 1.0 ing is made with two ropes, each of which is allowed to
sling up to 1000 kg vertically, at various hanging angles.
11.2 13.7 1.4
When two ropes sling a load vertically, up to 2000 kg of
12.5 15.7 1.6 total weight can be suspended. This weight becomes
1000 kg when two ropes make a 120 hanging angle. On
14 21.6 2.2
the other hand, two ropes are subject to an excessive
16 27.5 2.8 force as large as 4000 kg if they sling a 2000 kg load at a
lifting angle of 150
18 35.3 3.6
20 43.1 4.4
22.4 54.9 5.6
30 98.1 10.0
40 176.5 18.0
50 274.6 28.0
60 392.2 40.0

The allowable load value is estimated to be 1/6 or 1/7 of


the breaking strength of the rope used.
2. Sling wire ropes from the middle portion of the hook.
Slinging near the edge of the hook may cause the rope to
slip off the hook during hoisting, and a serious accident

WB140-2N WB150-2N 00-7


FOREWORD PUSH PULL COUPLER
12
PUSH PULL COUPLER 00

WARNING! Before carrying out the following work,


release the residual pressure from the
hydraulic tank. For details, see TESTING
AND ADJUSTING, Releasing residual pres-
sure from hydraulic tank.

WARNING! Even if the residual pressure is released from


the hydraulic tank, some hydraulic oil flows
out when the hose is disconnected. Accord-
ingly, prepare an oil receiving container.

TYPE 1 00

DISCONNECTION 00

1. Release the residual pressure from the hydraulic tank. For details,
see TESTING AND ADJUSTING, Releasing residual pressure from
hydraulic tank.
2. Hold the adapter (1) and push the hose joint (2) into the mating
adapter (3). The adapter can be pushed in about 3.5 mm. Do not hold
the rubber cap portion (4).
3. After the hose joint (2) is pushed into the adapter (3), press the rub-
ber cap portion (4) against the adapter until it clicks.

4. Hold the hose adapter (1) or hose (5) and pull it out. Since some
hydraulic oil flows out, prepare an oil receiving container.

CONNECTION 00

1. Hold the hose adapter (1) or hose (5) and insert it in the mating
adapter (3), aligning them with each other. Do not hold the rubber
cap portion (4).
2. After inserting the hose in the mating adapter, pull it back to check
its connecting condition. When the hose is pulled back, the rubber
cap portion moves toward the hose about 3.5 mm. This does not indi-
cate an abnormality.

00-8 WB140-2N WB150-2N


FOREWORD PUSH PULL COUPLER

TYPE 2 00

DISCONNECTION 00

1. Hold the mouthpiece of the tightening portion and push body (2) in
straight until sliding prevention ring (1) contacts contact surface a of
the hexagonal portion at the male end.

2. Hold in the condition in Step 1, and turn the lever (4) to the right -
clockwise.

3. Hold in the condition in Steps 1 and 2, and pull out the whole body
(2) to disconnect it.

CONNECTION 00

1. Hold the mouthpiece of the tightening portion and push body (2) in
straight until sliding prevention ring (1) contacts surface a of the
hexagonal portion at the male end to connect it.

00-9 WB140-2N WB150-2N


FOREWORD PUSH PULL COUPLER
12
TYPE 3 00

DISCONNECTION 00

1. Hold the mouthpiece of the tightening portion and push the body (2)
in straight until sliding prevention ring (1) contacts surface a of the
hexagonal portion at the male end.

2. Hold in the condition in Step 1, and push until the cover (3) contacts
surface a of the hexagonal portion at the male end.

3. Hold in the condition in Steps 1 and 2, and pull out the whole body
(2) to disconnect it.

CONNECTION 00

1. Hold the mouthpiece of the tightening portion and push the body (2)
in straight until the slide prevention ring (1) contacts surface a of the
hexagonal portion at the male end to connect it.

00-10 WB140-2N WB150-2N


FOREWORD COATING MATERIALS
12
COATING MATERIALS 00

The recommended coating materials prescribed in the shop manuals are listed below.
Category Code Part No. Quantity Container Main applications, features
Used to prevent rubber gaskets, rubber
LT-1A 790-129-9030 150 g Tube
cushions and cork plugs from coming out
Used in places requiring an immediately
effective, strong adhesive.
20 g Polyethylene Used for plastics (except polyethylene,
LT-1B 790-129-9050
(2 pes.) container polypropylene, tetrafluoroethylene, and
vinyl chloride), rubber, metal and non-
metal.
Features: Resistance to heat, chemicals
Polyethylene
LT-2 09940-00030 50 g Used for anti-loosening and sealant pur-
container
poses for bolts and plugs.
Adhesive:
790-129-9060
1 kg
(Set of adhesive Used as adhesive or sealant for metal, glass
LT-3 Hardening Can
and hardening or plastic.
agent:
agent)
Adhesives

500 g
Polyethylene
LT-4 790-129-9040 250 g Used as sealant for machined holes.
container
Holtz Used as heat-resisting sealant for repairing
790-126-9120 75 g Tube
MH 705 engine.
Quick hardening type adhesive.
Three
Polyethylene Cure time: within 5 sec. to 3 min.
bond 179-129-9140 2g
container Used mainly for adhesion of metals, rub-
1735
bers, plastics and woods.
Quick hardening type adhesive.
Aron- Quick cure type (max. strength after 30
Polyethylene
alpha 790-129-9130 50 g minutes).
container
201 Used mainly for adhesion of rubbers, plas-
tics and metals.
Features: Resistance to heat, chemicals
Loctite Polyethylene
79A-129-9110 50 cc Used at joint portions subject to high tem-
648-50 container
perature.
Used as adhesive or sealant for gaskets and
LG-1 790-129-9010 200 g Tube
packing of power train case, etc.
Features: Resistance to heat
Gasket Used as sealant for flange surfaces and bolts
sealant at high temperature locations; used to pre-
LG-3 790-129-9070 1 kg Can vent seizure.
Used as sealant for heat resistant gasket for
at high temperature locations such as engine
pre-combustion chamber, exhaust pipe.

00-11 WB140-2N WB150-2N


FOREWORD COATING MATERIALS

Category Code Part No. Quantity Container Main applications, features


Features: Resistance to water, oil
Used as sealant for flange surface, thread.
Also possible to use as sealant for flanges
LG-4 790-129-9020 200 g Tube
with large clearance.
Used as sealant for mating surfaces of final
drive case, transmission case.
Used as sealant for various threads, pipe
Polyethylene joints, flanges.
LG-5 790-129-9080 1 kg
container Used as sealant for tapered plugs, elbows,
nipples of hydraulic piping.
Gasket seal- Features: Silicon based, resistant to heat,
ant cold.
LG-6 09940-00011 250 g Tube Used as sealant for flange surface, thread.
Used as sealant for oil pan, final drive case,
etc.
Features: Silicon based, quick hardening
type.
LG-7 09920-00150 150 g Tube
Used as sealant for flywheel housing, intake
manifold, oil pan, thermostat housing, etc.
Three
Used as heat-resisting sealant for repairing
bond 790-129-9090 100 g Tube
engines.
1211
Used as lubricant for sliding parts (to pre-
LM-G 09940-00051 60 g Can
Molybdenum

vent squeaking).
disulphide
lubricant

Used to prevent seizure or scuffing of the


LM-P 09940-00040 200 g Tube thread when press fitting or shrink fitting.
Used as lubricant for linkage, bearings, etc.
SYG2-400LI
SYG2-350LI
G2-LI SYG2-400LI-A Various Various General purpose type
SYG2-160LI
SYGA160CNLI
SYG2-400CA
SYG2-350CA
Used for normal temperature, light load
SYG2-400CA-A
G2-CA Various Various bearing at places in contact with water or
Grease SYG2-160CA
steam.
SYG2-
160CNCA
disulphide lubricant
Molybdenum

400 g (10 per


SYG2-400M Belows type Used for places with heavy load.
case)

00-12 WB140-2N WB150-2N


FOREWORD STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUE
12
STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUE 00

STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUE OF BOLTS AND NUTS 00

The following charts give the standard tightening torques of bolts and nuts. Exceptions are given in DISASSEMBLY AND
ASSEMBLY.

Thread diameter of bolt Width across flats

mm mm Nm lbf ft
6 10 11.8 - 14.7 8.70 - 10.84

8 13 27 - 34 19.91 - 25.07

10 17 59 - 74 43.51 - 54.57

12 19 98 - 123 72.28 - 90.72

14 22 153 - 190 112.84 - 140.13

16 24 235 - 285 173.32 - 210.20

18 27 320 - 400 236.02 - 295.02

20 30 455 - 565 335.59 - 416.72

22 32 610 - 765 449.91 - 564.23

24 36 785 - 980 578.98 - 722.81

27 41 1150 - 1440 848.19 - 1062.09

30 46 1520 - 1910 1121.09 - 1408.74

33 50 1960 - 2450 1445.62 - 1807.02

36 55 2450 - 3040 1807.02 - 2242.19

39 60 2890 - 3630 2131.55 - 2677.35

Thread diameter of bolt Width across flats

mm mm Nm lbf ft
6 10 5.9 - 9.8 4.35 - 7.22

8 13 13.7 - 23.5 10.10 - 17.33

10 14 34.3 - 46.1 25.29 - 34.00

12 27 74.5 - 90.2 54.94 - 66.52

00-13 WB140-2N WB150-2N


FOREWORD STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUE
12
TIGHTENING TORQUE OF HOSE NUTS 00

Use these torques for hose nuts.


Thread diameter Width across flat Tightening torque
Nominal No.
mm mm Nm lbf ft
02 14 19 19.6 - 29.4 14.5 - 21.7
03 18 24 29.4 - 68.6 21.7 - 50.6
04 22 27 58.9 - 98.1 44.4 - 72.4
05 24 32 107.9 - 166.7 79.6 - 123.0
06 30 36 147.1 - 205.9 108.5 - 151.9
10 33 41 147.1 - 245.1 108.5 - 180.8
12 36 46 196.2 - 294.2 144.7 - 217.0
14 42 55 245.2 - 343.2 180.9 - 253.1

TIGHTENING TORQUE OF SPLIT FLANGE BOLTS 00

Use these torques for split flange bolts.


Thread diameter Width across flat Tightening torque
mm mm Nm kgm
10 14 59 - 74 43.51 - 54.57

12 17 98 - 123 72.28 - 90.72

16 22 235 - 285 173.32 - 210.20

TIGHTENING TORQUE FOR FLARED NUTS 00

Use these torques for flared part of nut.

Thread diameter Width across flat Tightening torque


mm mm Nm lbf ft
14 19 24.5 4.9 18.0 3.6

18 24 49 19.6 36.1 14.4

22 27 78.5 19.6 57.8 14.4

24 32 137.3 29.4 101.2 21.6

30 36 176.5 29.4 130.1 21.6

33 41 196.1 49 144.6 36.1

36 46 245.2 49 180.8 36.1

42 55 294.2 49 216.9 36.1

00-14 WB140-2N WB150-2N


FOREWORD STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUE
12
TABLE OF TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR O-RING BOSS PIPING JOINTS 00

Unless there are special instructions, tighten the O-ring boss piping joints to the torque below.

Thread diameter Width across flat Tightening torque (Nm {lbf ft})
Norminal No.
mm mm Range Target
02 14 35 - 63 {25.81 - 46.46} 44 {32.45}
03, 04 20 84 - 132 {61.95 - 97.35} 103 {75.96}
Varies depending on
05, 06 24 128 - 186 {94.40 - 137.18} 157 {115.79}
type of connector.
10, 12 33 363 - 480 {267.73 - 354.02} 422 {311.25}
14 42 746 - 1010 {550.22 - 744.93} 883 {651.26}

TABLE OF TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR O-RING BOSS PLUGS 00

Unless there are special instructions, tighten the O-ring boss plugs to the torque below.

Thread diameter Width across flat Tightening torque (Nm {lbf lb})
Norminal No.
mm mm Range Target
08 08 14 5.88 - 8.82 {4.33 - 6.50} 7.35 {5.42}
10 10 17 9.8 - 12.74 {7.22 - 9.39} 11.27 {8.31}
12 12 19 14.7 - 19.6 {10.84 - 14.45} 17.64 {13.01}
14 14 22 19.6 - 24.5 {14.45 - 18.07} 22.54 {16.62}
16 16 24 24.5 - 34.3 {18.07 - 25.29} 29.4 {21.68}
18 18 27 34.3 - 44.1 {25.29 - 32.52} 39.2 {28.91}
20 20 30 44.1 - 53.9 {32.52 - 39.75} 49.0 {36.14}
24 24 32 58.8 - 78.4 {43.36 - 57.82} 68.6 {50.59}
30 30 32 93.1 - 122.5 {68.66 - 90.35} 107.8 {79.50}
33 33 _ 107.8 - 147.0 {79.50 - 108.42} 124.4 {91.75}
36 36 36 127.4 - 176.4 {93.96 - 130.10} 151.9 {112.03}
42 42 _ 181.3 - 240.1 {133.72 - 177.08} 210.7 {155.40}
52 52 _ 274.4 - 367.5 {202.38 - 271.05} 323.4 {238.52}

TIGHTENING TORQUE TABLE FOR HOSES (TAPER SEAL TYPE AND FACE
SEAL TYPE) 00

Tighten the hoses (taper seal type and face seal type) to the following torque, unless otherwise specified.
Apply the following torque when the threads are coated (wet) with engine oil.

Taper seal
Tightening torque (Nm {lbf ft}) Face seal type
type
Nominal Width
Nominal thread
size of hose across flats Thread size Root diameter (mm)
Range Target size - Threads per
(mm) (Reference)
inch, Thread series
34 - 54 {25.0 - 39.8} 44 {32.4} - 9/16 - 18UN 14.3
02 19
34 - 63 {25.0 - 46.4} 44 {32.4} 14 - -
22 54 - 93 {39.8 - 68.5} 74 {54.5} - 11/16 -16UN 17.5
03
24 59 - 98 {43.5 - 72.2} 78 57.5} 18 - -
04 27 84 - 132 {61.9 - 97.3} 103 {75.9} 22 13/16 - 16UN 20.6
05 32 128 - 186 {94.4 - 137.1} 157 {115.7} 24 1 - 14UNS 25.4
06 36 177 - 245 {130.5 - 180.7} 216 {159.3} 30 1 3/16 - 12UN 30.2
(10) 41 177 - 245 {130.5 - 180.7} 216 {159.3} 33 - -
(12) 46 197 - 294 {145.3 - 216.8} 245 {180.7} 36 - -
(14) 55 246 - 343 {181.4 - 252.9} 294 {216.8} 42 - -

00-15 WB140-2N WB150-2N


FOREWORD ELECTRIC WIRE CODE
12
ELECTRIC WIRE CODE 00

In the wiring diagrams, various colors and symbols are employed to indicate the thickness of wires. This wire code table will
help you understand WIRING DIAGRAMS.
Example: 05WB indicates a cable having a nominal number 05 and white coating with black stripe.

CLASSIFICATION BY THICKNESS 00

Copper wire
Nominal num- Cable O.D. Current rat-
Number of Dia. Of strand Cross section Applicable circuit
ber (mm) ing (A)
strands (mm) (mm)
0.85 11 0.32 0.88 2.4 12 Starting, lighting, signal etc.
2 26 0.32 2.09 3.1 20 Lighting, signal etc.
5 65 0.32 5.23 4.6 37 Charging and signal
15 84 0.45 13.36 7.0 59 Starting (Glow plug)
40 85 0.80 42.73 11.4 135 Starting
60 127 0.80 63.84 13.6 178 Starting
100 217 0.80 109.1 17.6 230 Starting

CLASSIFICATION BY COLOR AND CODE 00

Circuits
Priority Classi- Charging Ground Starting Lighting Instrument Signal Other
fication
Primary

Code W B B R Y G L
1
Color White Black Black Red Yellow Green Blue
Code WR BW RW YR GW LW
2 White & Black & Red & Yellow & Green & Blue &
Color
Red White White Red White White
Code WB BY RB YB GR LR
3 White & Black & Yel- Yellow & Green &
Color Red & Black Blue & Red
Black low Black Red
Code WL BR RY YG GY LY
Auxiliary

4 White & Red & Yel- Yellow & Green & Blue & Yel-
Color Black & Red
Blue low Green Yellow low
Code WG RG YL GB LB
5 White & Red & Yellow & Green & Blue &
Color
Green Green Blue Black Black
Code RL YW GL
6 Yellow & Green &
Color Red & Blue
White Blue

00-16 WB140-2N WB150-2N


FOREWORD CONVERSION TABLES
12
CONVERSION TABLES 00

METHOD OF USING THE CONVERSION TABLE 00

The Conversion Table in this section is provided to enable simple conversion of figures. For details of the method of using the
Conversion Table, see the example given below.

EXAMPLE
Method of using the Conversion Table to convert from millimeters to inches.
1. Convert 55 mm into inches.
A. Locate the number 50 in the vertical column at the left side, take this as b, then draw a horizontal line from b.

B. Locate the number 5 in the row across the top, take this as c, then draw a perpendicular line down from c.

C. Take the point where the two lines cross as d. This point d gives the value when converting from millimeters to
inches. Therefore, 55 millimeters = 2.165 inches.

2. Convert 550 mm into inches.


A. The number 550 does not appear in the table, so divide by 10 (move the decimal one place to the left) to convert it to
55 mm.

B. Carry out the same procedure as above to convert 55 mm to 2.165 inches.

C. The original value (550 mm) was divided by 10, so multiply 2.165 inches by 10 (move the decimal one place to the
right) to return to the original value. This gives 550 mm = 21.65 inches.

c
Millimeters to inches 1 mm = 0.03937 in
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 0.039 0.079 0.118 0.157 0.197 0.236 0.276 0.315 0.354
10 0.394 0.433 0.472 0.512 0.551 0.591 0.630 0.669 0.709 0.748
20 0.787 0.827 0.866 0.906 0.945 0.984 1.024 1.063 1.102 1.142
30 1.181 1.220 1.260 1.299 1.339 1.378 1.417 1.457 1.496 1.536
40 1.575 1.614 1.654 1.693 1.732 1.772 1.811 1.850 1.890 1.929
d
50 1.969 2.008 2.047 2.087 2.126 2.165 2.205 2.244 2.283 2.323
b
60 2.362 2.402 2.441 2.480 2.520 2.559 2.598 2.638 2.677 2.717
70 2.756 2.795 2.835 2.874 2.913 2.953 2.992 3.032 3.071 3.110
80 3.150 3.189 3.228 3.268 3.307 3.346 3.386 3.425 3.465 3.504
90 3.543 3.583 3.622 3.661 3.701 3.740 3.780 3.819 3.858 3.898

00-17 WB140-2N WB150-2N


FOREWORD CONVERSION TABLES
12

Millimeters to Inches 1 mm = 0.03937 in


0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 0.039 0.079 0.118 0.157 0.197 0.236 0.276 0.315 0.354
10 0.394 0.433 0.472 0.512 0.551 0.591 0.630 0.669 0.709 0.748
20 0.787 0.827 0.866 0.906 0.945 0.984 1.024 1.063 1.102 1.142
30 1.181 1.220 1.260 1.299 1.339 1.378 1.417 1.457 1.496 1.536
40 1.575 1.614 1.654 1.693 1.732 1.772 1.811 1.850 1.890 1.929

50 1.969 2.008 2.047 2.087 2.126 2.165 2.205 2.244 2.283 2.323
60 2.362 2.402 2.441 2.480 2.520 2.559 2.598 2.638 2.677 2.717
70 2.756 2.795 2.835 2.874 2.913 2.953 2.992 3.032 3.071 3.110
80 3.150 3.189 3.228 3.268 3.307 3.346 3.386 3.425 3.465 3.504
90 3.543 3.583 3.622 3.661 3.701 3.740 3.780 3.819 3.858 3.898

Kilogram to Pound 1 kg = 2.2046 lb


0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 2.20 4.41 6.61 8.82 11.02 13.23 15.43 17.64 19.84
10 22.05 24.25 26.46 28.66 30.86 33.07 35.27 37.48 39.68 41.89
20 44.09 46.30 48.50 50.71 51.91 55.12 57.32 59.53 61.73 63.93
30 66.14 68.34 70.55 72.75 74.96 77.16 79.37 81.57 83.78 85.98
40 88.18 90.39 92.59 94.80 97.00 99.21 101.41 103.62 105.82 108.03

50 110.23 112.44 114.64 116.85 119.05 121.25 123.46 125.66 127.87 130.07
60 132.28 134.48 136.69 138.89 141.10 143.30 145.51 147.71 149.91 152.12
70 154.32 156.53 158.73 160.94 163.14 165.35 167.55 169.76 171.96 174.17
80 176.37 178.57 180.78 182.98 185.19 187.39 189.60 191.80 194.01 196.21
90 198.42 200.62 202.83 205.03 207.24 209.44 211.64 213.85 216.05 218.26

00-18 WB140-2N WB150-2N


FOREWORD CONVERSION TABLES
12

Liter to U.S. Gallon 1 L = 0.2642 U.S. Gal


0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 0.264 0.528 0.793 1.057 1.321 1.585 1.849 2.113 2.378
10 2.642 2.906 3.170 3.434 3.698 3.963 4.227 4.491 4.755 5.019
20 5.283 5.548 5.812 6.076 6.340 6.604 6.869 7.133 7.397 7.661
30 7.925 8.189 8.454 8.718 8.982 9.246 9.510 9.774 10.039 10.303
40 10.567 10.831 11.095 11.359 11.624 11.888 12.152 12.416 12.680 12.944

50 13.209 13.473 13.737 14.001 14.265 14.529 14.795 15.058 15.322 15.586
60 15.850 16.115 16.379 16.643 16.907 17.171 17.435 17.700 17.964 18.228
70 18.492 18.756 19.020 19.285 19.549 19.813 20.077 20.341 20.605 20.870
80 21.134 21.398 21.662 21.926 22.190 22.455 22.719 22.983 23.247 23.511
90 23.775 24.040 24.304 24.568 24.832 25.096 25.361 25.625 25.889 26.153

Liter to U.K. Gallon 1 L = 0.21997 U.K. Gal


0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 0.220 0.440 0.660 0.880 1.100 1.320 1.540 1.760 1.980
10 2.200 2.420 2.640 2.860 3.080 3.300 3.520 3.740 3.950 4.179
20 4.399 4.619 4.839 5.059 5.279 5.499 5.719 5.939 6.159 6.379
30 6.599 6.819 7.039 7.259 7.479 7.699 7.919 8.139 8.359 8.579
40 8.799 9.019 9.239 9.459 9.679 9.899 10.119 10.339 10.559 10.778

50 10.998 11.281 11.438 11.658 11.878 12.098 12.318 12.528 12.758 12.978
60 13.198 13.418 13.638 13.858 14.078 14.298 14.518 14.738 14.958 15.178
70 15.398 15.618 15.838 16.058 16.278 16.498 16.718 16.938 17.158 17.378
80 17.598 17.818 18.037 18.257 18.477 18.697 18.917 19.137 19.357 19.577
90 19.797 20.017 20.237 20.457 20.677 20.897 21.117 21.337 21.557 21.777

WB140-2N WB150-2N 00-19


FOREWORD CONVERSION TABLES
12

kgm to ft. lb. 1 kgm = 7.233 ft. lb.


0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 7.2 14.5 21.7 28.9 36.2 43.4 50.6 57.9 65.1
10 72.3 79.6 86.8 94.0 101.3 108.5 115.7 123.0 130.2 137.4
20 144.7 151.9 159.1 166.4 173.6 180.8 188.1 195.3 202.5 209.8
30 217.0 224.2 231.5 238.7 245.9 253.2 260.4 267.6 274.9 282.1
40 289.3 296.6 303.8 311.0 318.3 325.5 332.7 340.0 347.2 354.4

50 361.7 368.9 376.1 383.4 390.6 397.8 405.1 412.3 419.5 426.8
60 434.0 441.2 448.5 455.7 462.9 470.2 477.4 484.6 491.8 499.1
70 506.3 513.5 520.8 528.0 535.2 542.5 549.7 556.9 564.2 571.4
80 578.6 585.9 593.1 600.3 607.6 614.8 622.0 629.3 636.5 643.7
90 651.0 658.2 665.4 672.7 679.9 687.1 694.4 701.6 708.8 716.1

100 723.3 730.5 737.8 745.0 752.2 759.5 766.7 773.9 781.2 788.4
110 795.6 802.9 810.1 817.3 824.6 831.8 839.0 846.3 853.5 860.7
120 868.0 875.2 882.4 889.7 896.9 904.1 911.4 918.6 925.8 933.1
130 940.3 947.5 954.8 962.0 969.2 976.5 983.7 990.9 998.2 1005.4
140 1012.6 1019.9 1027.1 1034.3 1041.5 1048.8 1056.0 1063.2 1070.5 1077.7

150 1084.9 1092.2 1099.4 1106.6 1113.9 1121.1 1128.3 1135.6 1142.8 1150.0
160 1157.3 1164.5 1171.7 1179.0 1186.2 1193.4 1200.7 1207.9 1215.1 1222.4
170 1129.6 1236.8 1244.1 1251.3 1258.5 1265.8 1273.0 1280.1 1287.5 1294.7
180 1301.9 1309.2 1316.4 1323.6 1330.9 1338.1 1345.3 1352.63 1359.8 1367.0
190 1374.3 1381.5 1388.7 1396.0 1403.2 1410.4 1417.7 1424.9 1432.1 1439.4

00-20 WB140-2N WB150-2N


FOREWORD CONVERSION TABLES
12

kg/cm2 to lb/in2 1 kg/cm2 = 14.2233lb/in2


0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 14.2 28.4 42.7 56.9 71.1 85.3 99.6 113.8 128.0
10 142.2 156.5 170.7 184.9 199.1 213.4 227.6 241.8 256.0 270.2
20 284.5 298.7 312.9 327.1 341.4 355.6 369.8 384.0 398.3 412.5
30 426.7 440.9 455.1 469.4 483.6 497.8 512.0 526.3 540.5 554.7
40 568.9 583.2 597.4 611.6 625.8 640.1 654.3 668.5 682.7 696.9

50 711.2 725.4 739.6 753.8 768.1 782.3 796.5 810.7 825.0 839.2
60 853.4 867.6 881.8 896.1 910.3 924.5 938.7 953.0 967.2 981.4
70 995.6 1010 1024 1038 1053 1067 1081 1095 1109 1124
80 1138 1152 1166 1181 1195 1209 1223 1237 1252 1266
90 1280 1294 1309 1323 1337 1351 1365 1380 1394 1408

100 1422 1437 1451 1465 1479 1493 1508 1522 1536 1550
110 1565 1579 1593 1607 1621 1636 1650 1664 1678 1693
120 1707 1721 1735 1749 1764 1778 1792 1806 1821 1835
130 1849 1863 1877 1892 1906 1920 19324 1949 1963 1977
140 1991 2005 2034 2048 2062 2077 2091 2105 2119

150 2134 2148 2162 2176 2190 2205 2219 2233 2247 2262
160 2276 2290 2304 2318 2333 2347 2361 2375 2389 2404
170 2418 2432 2446 2460 2475 2489 2503 2518 2532 2546
180 2560 2574 2589 2603 2617 2631 2646 2660 2674 2688
190 2702 2717 2731 2745 2759 2773 2788 2802 2816 2830

200 2845 2859 2873 2887 2901 2916 2930 2944 2958 2973
210 2987 3001 3015 3030 3044 3058 3072 3086 3101 3115
220 3129 3143 3158 3172 3186 3200 3214 3229 3243 3257
230 3271 3286 3300 3314 3328 3343 3357 3371 3385 3399
240 3414 3428 3442 3456 3470 3485 3499 3513 3527 3542

WB140-2N WB150-2N 00-21


FOREWORD CONVERSION TABLES
12
Temperature
Fahrenheit Centigrade Conversion; a simple way to convert a Fahrenheit temperature reading into a Centigrade temperature
reading or vise versa is to enter the accompanying table in the center or boldface column of figures. These figures refer to the
temperature in either Fahrenheit or Centigrade degrees. If it is desired to convert from Fahrenheit to Centigrade degrees, con-
sider the center column as a table of Fahrenheit temperatures and read the corresponding Centigrade temperature in the column
at the left. If it is desired to convert from Centigrade to Fahrenheit degrees, consider the center column as a table of Centigrade
values, and read the corresponding Fahrenheit temperature on the right.
C F C F C F C F
-40.4 -40 -40.0 -11.7 11 51.8 7.8 46 114.8 27.2 81 117.8
-37.2 .35 -31.0 -11.1 12 53.6 8.3 47 116.6 27.8 82 179.6
-34.4 -30 -22.0 -10.6 13 55.4 8.9 48 118.4 28.3 83 181.4
-31.7 -25 -13.0 -10.0 14 57.2 9.4 49 120.2 28.9 84 183.2
-28.9 -20 -4.0 -9.4 15 59.0 10.0 50 122.0 29.4 85 185.0

-28.3 -19 -2.2 -8.9 16 60.8 10.6 51 123.8 30.0 86 186.8


-27.8 -18 -0.4 -8.3 17 62.6 11.1 52 125.6 30.6 87 188.6
-27.2 -17 1.4 -7.8 18 64.4 11.7 53 127.4 31.1 88 190.4
-26.7 -16 3.2 -7.2 19 66.2 12.2 54 129.2 31.7 89 192.2
-26.1 -15 5.0 -6.7 20 68.0 12.8 55 131.0 32.2 90 194.0

-25.6 -14 6.8 -6.1 21 69.8 13.3 56 132.8 32.8 91 195.8


-25.0 -13 8.6 -5.6 22 71.6 13.9 57 134.6 33.3 92 197.6
-24.4 -12 10.4 -5.0 23 73.4 14.4 58 136.4 33.9 93 199.4
-23.9 -11 12.2 -4.4 24 75.2 15.0 59 138.2 34.4 94 201.2
-23.3 -10 14.0 -3.9 25 77.0 15.6 60 140.0 35.0 95 203.0

-22.8 -9 15.8 -3.3 26 78.8 16.1 61 141.8 35.6 96 204.8


-22.2 -8 17.6 -2.8 27 80.6 16.7 62 143.6 36.1 97 206.6
-21.7 -7 19.4 -2.2 28 82.4 17.2 63 145.4 36.7 98 208.4
-21.1 -6 21.2 -1.7 29 84.2 17.8 64 147.2 37.2 99 210.2
-20.6 -5 23.0 -1.1 30 86.0 18.3 65 149.0 37.8 100 212.0

-20.0 -4 24.8 -0.6 31 87.8 18.9 66 150.8 40.6 105 221.0


-19.4 -3 26.6 0 32 89.6 19.4 67 152.6 43.3 110 230.0
-18.9 -2 28.4 0.6 33 91.4 20.0 68 154.4 46.1 115 239.0
-18.3 -1 30.2 1.1 34 93.2 20.6 69 156.2 48.9 120 248.0
-17.8 0 32.0 1.7 35 95.0 21.1 70 158.0 51.7 125 257.0

-17.2 1 33.8 2.2 36 96.8 21.7 71 159.8 54.4 130 266.0


-16.7 2 35.6 2.8 37 98.6 22.2 72 161.6 57.2 135 275.0
-16.1 3 37.4 3.3 38 100.4 22.8 73 163.4 60.0 140 284.0
-15.6 4 39.2 3.9 39 102.2 23.3 74 165.2 62.7 145 293.0
-15.0 5 41.0 4.4 40 104.0 23.9 75 167.0 65.6 150 302.0

-14.4 6 42.8 5.0 41 105.8 24.4 76 168.8 68.3 155 311.0


-13.9 7 44.6 5.6 42 107.6 25.0 77 170.6 71.1 160 320.0
-13.3 8 46.4 6.1 43 109.4 25.6 78 172.4 73.9 165 329.0
-12.8 9 48.2 6.7 44 111.2 26.1 79 174.2 76.7 170 338.0
-12.2 10 50.0 7.2 45 113.0 26.7 80 176.0 79.4 175 347.0

00-22 WB140-2N WB150-2N


01 GENERAL

SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-2
WEIGHT TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-5
FUEL COOLANT AND LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-6

WB140-2N WB150-2N 01-1


GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
12
SPECIFICATIONS
Description Unit WB140-2N - A20637 and UP WB150-2N - A60029 and UP
Weight

Minimum 7400 7400


Operating weight kg
Maximum 8800 8800
Loader 1.03 1.03
Bucket capacity m
Backhoe 0.2 0.2
Forward 1st 6 6
Forward 2nd 11 11
Forward 3rd 21 21
Forward 4th 39 39
Performance

Travel speeds km/h


Reverse 1st 6 6
Reverse 2nd 11 11
Reverse 3rd 21 21
Reverse 4th 39 39
Forward
Max rimpull kg
Reverse
Gradeability Degrees
Outside Wheel
Min. Turning Radius mm
Tip of BOCE
Dimensions

mm

01-2 WB140-2N WB150-2N


GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
12
Description Unit WB140-2N - A20637 and UP WB150-2N - A60029 and UP
Model Komatsu S4D106-1FH diesel en- Komatsu S4D106-1FA diesel en-
Type gine four cycle, water cooled, four gine four cycle, water cooled, four
cylinder, direct injection with turbo-cylinder, direct injection with turbo-
charger charger
No. of cylinders - bore x stroke mm
Piston displacement L
Engine

Flywheel horsepower @ 2000 rpm kW 64 72


Maximum torque @ 1400 rpm Nm 330 375
Min fuel consumption g/kWh
High idle rpm
Low idle rpm
Starting motor V kW 24, 7.5
Alternator VA 24, 35
Battery V Ah 24, 112x2
Torque converter
Power Train

Transmission
Reduction gear
Differential
Final drive
Drive type
Wheels and Axle

Front axle
Rear axle

Tire
Wheel rim
Front tire
Inflation pressure kg/cm
Rear tire
Steering Brakes

Main brake
Parking brake
Type
Structure

WB140-2N WB150-2N 01-3


GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
12
Description Unit WB140-2N - A20637 and UP WB150-2N - A60029 and UP
Torque converter L/min
Hydraulic system Cylinders Pumps

Steering L/min
Hydraulic L/min

mm

Work equipment valveType


Set pressure kg/cm
Travel control valveType
Set pressure kg/cm
Cooling fan motorType
Work

Link type Simple link


Bucket edge type Flat edge with BOCE and bolt on teeth

01-4 WB140-2N WB150-2N


GENERAL WEIGHT TABLE
12
WEIGHT TABLE
This table is a guide for use when transporting or handling components.

Unit : kg

WB140-2N WB150-2N
Machine Model
A20637 and UP A60029 and UP

WB140-2N WB150-2N 01-5


GENERAL FUEL COOLANT AND LUBRICANTS
12
FUEL COOLANT AND LUBRICANTS
It is not our policy to approve fuel, coolant and lubricants or to guarantee performance in service. The responsibility for the
quality of the fuel, coolant and lubricant must remain with the supplier.
When in doubt, consult your Komatsu distributor. The following table shows specified fuel, coolant and lubricants recom-
mended for this machine.

Ambient Temperature Capacity


Kind of
Reservoir
fluid
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50C Specified Refill

SAE 5W-30

SAE 10W

SAE 20W-20
Oil API CI-4 or JASO SH-1

Engine oil
SAE 30 7.9 L 7.9 L
pan
SAE 40

SAE 10W-30

SAE 15W-40

SAE 5W*

Hydraulic SAE 10W


150 L 92 L
system SAE 30

SAE 10W-30

Hydraulic
system with See page 3-12 150 L 92 L
biodegrad-
Front axle
6.5 L 6.5 L
diff

Final gear See Note 1 1 L each 1 L each

Rear axle diff 14.5 L 14.5 L

Final gear 1.5 L each 1.5 L each

Transmission 20 L 17 L
ATF GM DEXRON II D
Brakes 0.8 L 0.8 L
ASTM D975
Diesel No. 1
Fuel tank 130 L -
fuel
ASTM D975 No. 2

Engine cool-
Coolant AF-NAC 14 L -
ing system

OPTION FOR VERY COLD AREAS:If the temperature is below 10C, contact your distributor for advise on the type of oil
to be used.

01-6 WB140-2N WB150-2N


GENERAL FUEL COOLANT AND LUBRICANTS
12 API American Petroleum Institute
ASTMAmerican Society of Testing and Materials
NLGINational Lubricating Grease Institute
SAESociety of Automotive Engineers
Specified CapacityTotal amount of oil including oil for components and piping.
Refill CapacityAmount of oil needed to refill system during normal maintenance.
Other equipment may be necessary when operating the machine at temperatures below -20C. Consult your Komatsu distribu-
tor for your specific needs.
NOTE Use only diesel fuel. The engine mounted on this machine employs electronic control and a high
pressure fuel injection device to obtain good fuel consumption and good exhaust characteristics.
For this reason, it requires high precision for the parts and good lubrication. If kerosene or other
fuel with low lubricating ability is used, there will be a significant drop in durability.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 01-7


GENERAL FUEL COOLANT AND LUBRICANTS
12

MEMORANDA

01-8 WB140-2N WB150-2N


10 STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD

12
ENGINE MOUNTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
TIER I ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
4WD MACHINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
2WD MACHINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
TIER II ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
4WD MACHINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
2WD MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
POWER TRAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
4WD MACHINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
POWER FLOW - 4WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
2WD MACHINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
TRANSMISSION DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
4WD MACHINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
2WD MACHINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
COMPLETE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
FORWARD REVERSE CLUTCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
1ST THROUGH 4TH SPEED SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
4WD SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
FRONT AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
4WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
COMPLETE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
DIFFERENTIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
PLANETARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
2WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
COMPLETE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
CENTER HOUSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
STEERING KNUCKLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
REAR AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
COMPLETE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
DIFFERENTIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
PLANETARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
BRAKES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
HYDRAULIC PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-1


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD TABLE OF CONTENTS

PUMP OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45


CONTROL OF DELIVERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
PC VALVE, LS VALVE, SERVO PISTON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
LS VALVE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
PC VALVE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
WORKING MODE SOLENOID VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
STEERING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
TECHNICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
LOADER VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
2 SPOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
3 SPOOL VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
MECHANICAL CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
INLET SECTION VIEWS A-A AND B-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
ARM SECTION VIEW C-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
SWING SECTION VIEW D-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
LEFT OUTRIGGER SECTION VIEW E-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
RIGHT OUTRIGGER SECTION VIEW F-F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
BUCKET SECTION VIEW G-G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
BOOM SECTION VIEW H-H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
OUTLET SECTION VIEW J-J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
TELESCOPIC ARM SECTION VIEW K-K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
HAMMER SECTION VIEW L-L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
EXCAVATOR CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
INLET SECTION VIEWS A-A AND B-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
ARM SECTION VIEW C-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
SWING SECTION VIEW D-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
LEFT OUTRIGGER SECTION VIEW E-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
RIGHT OUTRIGGER SECTION VIEW F-F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
BUCKET SECTION VIEW G-G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
BOOM SECTION VIEW H-H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
OUTLET SECTION VIEW J-J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
TELESCOPIC ARM SECTION VIEW K-K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82
HAMMER SECTION VIEW L-L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
CLSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
OPERATING PRINCIPLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85
UNLOADING VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87
FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87
INTRODUCTION OF THE LS PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90
DELIVERY COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91
LIFD CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94

10-2 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD TABLE OF CONTENTS

FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94
LS DECOMPRESSION VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95
PRESSURE CUT OFF VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96
PRIORITY VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97
FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97
PPC JOYSTICK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98
LEFT VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98
RIGHT VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99
SOLENOID VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-100
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK - BACKHOE BOOM LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-100
PPC SUPPLY VALVE - ST2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-101
PPC TELESCOPIC ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-102
PPC HAMMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-103
PPC ARM AND HAMMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-104
LOADER CYLINDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-105
BOOM ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-105
CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-105
BUCKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-106
CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-106
MP BUCKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-107
CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-107
BACKHOE CYLINDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-108
BOOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-108
CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-108
ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-109
CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-109
BUCKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-110
CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-110
TELESCOPIC ARM CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-111
CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-111
SWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-112
CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-112
OUTRIGGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-113
CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-113
BOOM LOCK CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-114
FRONT WORK EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-115
REAR WORK EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-117
AIR CONDITIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-119

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-3


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD ENGINE MOUNTING
1212
ENGINE MOUNTING

TIER I ENGINE
4WD MACHINES

10-4 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD ENGINE MOUNTING
12
2WD MACHINES

B Tier I Engine e Transmission Mount


C Transmission F Rear Axle Input
D Engine Mount G Front Axle Input - 4WD

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-5


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION & MAINTENANCE STANDARDS ENGINE MOUNTING

12
TIER II ENGINE

4WD MACHINES

10-6 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD ENGINE MOUNTING
12
2WD MACHINE

B Tier II Engine e Transmission Mount


C Transmission F Rear Axle Input
D Engine Mount G Front Axle Input - 4WD

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-7


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION & MAINTENANCE STANDARDS POWER TRAIN

12
POWER TRAIN

4WD MACHINES

B Engine F Front Axle


C Torque Converter G Rear Axle
D Transmission H Front Drive Shaft
E Hydraulic Pump I Rear Drive Shaft

DESCRIPTION
The driving power for the engine b is transmitted through the flywheel to the converter c. The converter c uses hydrau-
lic oil to convert the torque transmitted by the engine b into driving power. The converter transmits motion to the drive
shaft of the transmission d and to the drive shaft of the hydraulic pump e.
The transmission d has two hydraulically activated clutches that can be selected by an electrically controlled gear selec-
tor. It also has manual gear selection (four forward gears and four reverse gears).
The driving power is transmitted from the transmission flanges to the front f and rear g axles through the drive shafts h
and i. The driving power transmitted to the front and rear axles is reduced by the differentials and then transmitted to the
planetary gear through the differential shafts.

10-8 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD POWER TRAIN
12
POWER FLOW - 4WD
Front Axle Rear Axle
Gears
Trans Diff Planet Total Trans Diff Planet Total
1st 4.28 61.238 5.350 91.362
2nd 2.372 33.939 2.965 50.633
2.385 6.000 2.846 6.000
3rd 1.239 17.685 1.544 26.367
4th 0.662 9.472 0.827 14.123

b Engine E Rear Drive Shaft H Front Drive Shaft


c Convert Transmission F Rear Axle I Front Axle
d Hydraulic Pump G Rear Tires J Front Tires

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-9


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION & MAINTENANCE STANDARDS POWER TRAIN

12
2WD MACHINES

B Engine e Hydraulic Pump


C Torque Converter F Rear Drive Shaft
D Transmission G Rear Axle

DESCRIPTION
The driving power for the engine b is transmitted through the flywheel to the converter c. The converter c uses hydrau-
lic oil to convert the torque transmitted by the engine b into driving power. The converter transmits motion to the drive
shaft of the transmission d and to the drive shaft of the hydraulic pump e.
The transmission d has two hydraulically activated clutches that can be selected by an electrically controlled gear selec-
tor. It also has manual gear selection (four forward gears and four reverse gears).
The driving power is transmitted from the transmission flange to the rear g axle through the drive shaft h. The driving
power transmitted to rear axle is reduced by the differential and then transmitted to the planetary gear through the differ-
ential shafts.

10-10 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD POWER TRAIN
12
Rear Axle
Trans Diff Planet Total
5.350 91.362
2.965 50.633
2.846 6.000
1.544 26.367
0.827 14.123

b Engine E Rear Drive Shaft


c Convert Transmission F Rear Axle
d Hydraulic Pump G Rear Tires

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-11


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD TRANSMISSION DIAGRAM
12
TRANSMISSION DIAGRAM

4WD MACHINES

b Engine E Transmission H Rear Axle Flange


c Torque Converter F Reverse Clutch I 4WD Clutch
d Forward Clutch G Hydraulic Pump J Front Axle Flange

10-12 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD TRANSMISSION DIAGRAM
12

B Converter Valve G Reverse Clutch 1! Control Valve


C Converter H Max Pressure Valve 1@ Check Valve
D Engine I Spin On Filter 1# Check Valve
E Oil Cooler J Pump 1$ 4WD Solenoid
F Forward Clutch 1) Suction Strainer 1% 4WD Clutch

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-13


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD TRANSMISSION DIAGRAM
12
2WD MACHINES

b Engine E Transmission H Rear Axle Flange


c Torque Converter F Reverse Clutch
d Forward Clutch G Hydraulic Pump

10-14 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD TRANSMISSION DIAGRAM
12

B Converter Valve F Forward Clutch J Pump


C Converter G Reverse Clutch 1) Suction Strainer
D Engine H Max Pressure Valve 1! Control Valve
E Oil Cooler I Spin On Filter 1@ Check Valve

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-15


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD TRANSMISSION
12
TRANSMISSION

COMPLETE ASSEMBLY

B Shift Lever F Suction Strainer a From Oil Cooler


C Torque Converter G Reverse Solenoid b To Oil Cooler
D Spin On Filter H Forward Solenoid c To Solenoid Valves
E Oil Temperature Sender I 4WD Solenoid d From Solenoid Valves

10-16 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD TRANSMISSION
12

B Shift Lever F Suction Strainer a From Oil Cooler


C Torque Converter G Reverse Solenoid b To Oil Cooler
D Spin On Filter H Forward Solenoid c To Solenoid Valves
E Oil Temperature Sender I 4WD Solenoid d From Solenoid Valves

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-17


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD TRANSMISSION
12

B Shift Lever F Suction Strainer a From Oil Cooler


C Torque Converter G Reverse Solenoid b To Oil Cooler
D Spin On Filter H Forward Solenoid c To Solenoid Valves
E Oil Temperature Sender d From Solenoid Valves

10-18 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD TRANSMISSION
12

B Shift Lever F Suction Strainer a From Oil Cooler


C Torque Converter G Reverse Solenoid b To Oil Cooler
D Spin On Filter H Forward Solenoid c To Solenoid Valves
E Oil Temperature Sender d From Solenoid Valves

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-19


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD TRANSMISSION
12

B Pump Drive Shaft H Rear Axle Flange 1# 4WD Clutch


C Forward Reverse Shaft I 3rd Driven Gear 1$ 4WD Clutch Shaft
D Reverse Gear Clutch J 4th Driven Gear 1% Front Axle Flange
E Forward Gear Clutch 1) 4WD Drive Gear 1^ 2nd Driven Gear
F Reverse Idler Gear Shaft 1! 1st Driven Gear 1& Rear Output Shaft
G Drive Gears and Shaft 1@ 4WD Driven Gear

10-20 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD TRANSMISSION
12

B Pump Drive Shaft H Rear Axle Flange 1# 4WD Clutch


C Forward Reverse Shaft I 3rd Driven Gear 1$ 4WD Clutch Shaft
D Reverse Gear Clutch J 4th Driven Gear 1% Front Axle Flange
E Forward Gear Clutch 1) 4WD Drive Gear 1^ 2nd Driven Gear
F Reverse Idler Gear Shaft 1! 1st Driven Gear 1& Rear Output Shaft
G Drive Gears and Shaft 1@ 4WD Driven Gear

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-21


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD TRANSMISSION
12

B Pump Drive Shaft G Drive Gears and Shaft 1! 1st Driven Gear
C Forward Reverse Shaft H Rear Axle Flange 1@ 2nd Driven Gear
D Reverse Gear Clutch I 3rd Driven Gear 1# Rear Output Shaft
E Forward Gear Clutch J 4th Driven Gear
F Reverse Idler Gear Shaft 1) Gear Spacer

10-22 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD TRANSMISSION
12

B Pump Drive Shaft G Drive Gears and Shaft 1! 1st Driven Gear
C Forward Reverse Shaft H Rear Axle Flange 1@ 2nd Driven Gear
D Reverse Gear Clutch I 3rd Driven Gear 1# Rear Output Shaft
E Forward Gear Clutch J 4th Driven Gear
F Reverse Idler Gear Shaft 1) Gear Spacer

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-23


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD TRANSMISSION
12

B Gear Shift Lever H 3rd And 4th Selecting Rod 1# Spin On Filter
C Centering Spring I 1st And 2nd Selecting Fork 1$ Cold Oil Relief Valve
D Return Spring J 4th Selecting Sensor 1% Return Spring
E Check Ball 1) 3rd And 4th Selector 1^ Return Spring
F 3rd And 4th Selecting Fork 1! 1st And 2nd Selector 1& Return Spring
G 1st And 2nd Selecting Rod 1@ Suction Strainer

10-24 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD TRANSMISSION
12

B Check Ball G Spring Guide Pin 1! Return Spring


C Return Spring H Valve 1@ Spool Return Spring
D Piston I Return Spring 1# Spool
E Return Spring J Valve 1$ Forward Solenoid
F Return Spring 1) Rod 1% Reverse Solenoid

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-25


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD TRANSMISSION
12
FORWARD REVERSE CLUTCH

B Reverse Gear E Reverse Clutch Piston a Reverse Clutch Port


C Forward Gear F Thrust Ring b Forward Clutch Port
D Forward Clutch Piston G Shaft c Lubrication Port

1ST THROUGH 4TH SPEED SHAFT

B 2nd Driver Gear E 4th Driven Gear H Thrust Ring


C 1st Driven Gear F 3rd Driven Gear I Synchronizer
D 4WD Gear g Rear Output Shaft J Gear Spacer

10-26 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD TRANSMISSION
12
4WD SHAFT

B Front Output Shaft E Cylinder a 4WD Pressure Port


C 4WD Driven Gear F Spring
D Thrust Ring G Disc

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-27


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD FRONT AXLE
12
FRONT AXLE

4WD
COMPLETE ASSEMBLY

B Steering Cylinder E Tie Rod Nut h Mounting Pin Bushing


C Oil Refill Plug F Adjustment Screw a Left Cylinder Port
D Oil Drain Plug G Lock Nut b Right Cylinder Port

Unit:mm
Criteria
Check Item Standard Tolerance Standard Clearance Remedy
Size Shaft Bushing Clearance Limit
0 +0.04
i Pin and Bushing Clearance 50 50 50.19 --- --- Replace
-0.039 0

DIFFERENTIAL

10-28 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD FRONT AXLE

B Side Gear H Differential Housing 1# Pinion Bearing Lock Nut


C Ring Gear I Bearing Spacer 1$ Inboard Pinion Bearing
D Driven Gear J Outboard Pinion Bearing 1% Pinion Gear
E Adjustment Lock Nut 1) Lip Seal Ring 1^ Dowel Pin
F Axle Shaft 1! Input Flange 1& Oil Drain Plug
G Dowel Pin 1@ Lip Seal Ring Cover

Unit : mm
Criteria
Check Item Remedy
Standard Clearance Clearance Limit
1* Axle Clearance --- ---
1( Ring and Pinion Gear Backlash 0.17 to 0.23 0.23
Adjust
2) Pinion Preload * 92 to 137 Nm
2! Ring and Pinion Gear Preload * 95.9 to 142.9 Nm
* - Without lip seal ring.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-29


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD FRONT AXLE
12
PLANETARY

B Planetary Carrier J Belleville Washer 1& Lip Ring Seal


C Planetary Gear 1) Upper King Pin Bushing 1* Tapered Roller Bearing
D Ring Gear 1! Lip Ring Seal 1( Retaining Ring
E Carrier Gear 1@ Axle Housing 2) Bolt Bushing
F Wheel Hub 1# Spherical Bearing 2! Stud Bolt
G Lip Ring Seal 1$ Lower King Pin Bushing 2@ Oil Drain Plug
H Upper King Pin 1% Lower King Pin 2# Sun Gear
I Adjustment Shim 1^ Belleville Washer 2$ Retaining Ring

Check Item Criteria Remedy


2% Hub Rotation Torque ---
Adjust
2^ Axle Shaft Clearance ---

10-30 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD FRONT AXLE
12
2WD
COMPLETE ASSEMBLY

B Steering Cylinder E Tie Rod Nut h Mounting Pin Bushing


C Oil Refill Plug F Adjustment Screw a Left Cylinder Port
D Oil Drain Plug G Lock Nut b Right Cylinder Port

Unit : mm
Criteria
Check Item Standard Tolerance Standard Clearance Remedy
Size Shaft Bushing Clearance Limit
0 +0.04
i Pin and Bushing Clearance 50 50 50.19 --- --- Replace
-0.039 0

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-31


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD FRONT AXLE
12
CENTER HOUSING

B Flange Plug c Flange Housing d Axle Housing

10-32 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD FRONT AXLE
12
STEERING KNUCKLE

B Housing Cover J Belleville Washer 1& Housing Plug


C Shaft Plug 1) Upper King Pin Bushing 1* Tapered Roller Bearing
D Screw 1! Housing Plug 1( Oil Drain Plug
E Bearing Retainer 1@ Axle Housing 2) Bolt Bushing
F Wheel Hub 1# Spherical Bearing 2! Stud Bolt
G Lip Ring Seal 1$ Lower King Pin Bushing
H Upper King Pin 1% Lower King Pin
I Adjustment Shim 1^ Belleville Washer

Check Item Criteria Remedy


2@ Hub Rotation Torque --- Adjust

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-33


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD REAR AXLE
12
REAR AXLE

COMPLETE ASSEMBLY

B Input Flange F Planetary Portion J Oil Drain Plug


C Differential Portion G Parking Brake Levers 1) Axle Housing Breather
D Brake Portion H Brake Bleeder Screws a Brake Port ................. 40.8 kg/cm
E Axle Housing I Oil Fill And Level Plugs b Diff Lock Port ......... 1295.4 kg/cm

10-34 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD REAR AXLE
12
DIFFERENTIAL

B Tapered Roller Bearing G Bearing Lock Nut 1! Lip Oil Seal


C Side Gear H Axle Shaft 1@ Input Flange
D Rotating Gear I Dowel Pin 1# Bearing Spacer
E Ring Gear J Tapered Roller Bearing 1$ Pinion Gear
F Differential Housing 1) Bearing Lock Nut 1% Differential Housing

Unit : mm
Criteria
Check Item Remedy
Standard Clearance Clearance Limit
1^ Axle Clearance --- ---
1& Ring And Pinion Gear Backlash 0.17 to 0.23 0.23
Adjust
1* Pinion Gear Preload * 92 to 138 Nm
1( Pinion Ring Gear Preload * 95.23 to 141.84 Nm

* - Without lip seal ring.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-35


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD REAR AXLE
12
PLANETARY

B Planetary Gear Carrier H Lip Ring Seal 1# Outer Ring Gear


C Wheel Stud I Shaft Coupler 1$ Oil Fill And Drain Plug
D Wheel Hub J Inner Axle Shaft 1% Bolt Bushing
E Planet Gear 1) Sun Gear Shaft 1^ Planet Gear Shaft
F Gear Carrier 1! Shaft Bushing
G Tapered Roller Bearings 1@ Retaining Ring

Check Item Criteria Remedy


1& Hub Rotation Torque ---
Adjust
1* Axle Shaft Clearance ---

10-36 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD REAR AXLE
12
BRAKES

B Disc Plate Bushing f Parking Brake Control Cam j Inner Disc Separator Plate
C Parking Brake Control Rod g Brake Disc Plate 1) Outer Disc Separator Plate
D Brake Bleeder Valve h Actuator Piston
E Parking Brake Lever i Brake Disc Plate Return Spring

Unit : mm
Spring Criteria
Standard Size Repair Limit
Check Item Remedy
Free Installed Installed Free Installed
Length Length Load Length Load
1! Brake Disc Return Spring 27 13 127 Nm 21 10 Nm
1@ Disc Return Spring 35 19 369 Nm 21 10 Nm Replace
1# Disc Thickness 4.85 to 5 3.3

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-37


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD REAR AXLE
12
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK

B Engagement Sleeve e Fork Spacer h Piston Cover


C Locking Pin f Shift Fork i Retaining Ring
D Control Rod g Piston a Diff Lock Port ......... 1295.4 kg/cm

10-38 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
HYDRAULIC PUMP

b Delivery Variation Valve a P Port From Hydraulic Tank Suction Line


c Valve Working Mode Solenoid b Case Drain To Suction Line
d Delivery Control Valve c LS Pressure From Loader Control Valve
d Output To Loader Control Valve

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-39


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD HYDRAULIC PUMP
12

b Delivery Variation Valve a P Port From Hydraulic Tank Suction Line


c Valve Working Mode Solenoid b Case Drain To Suction Line
d Delivery Control Valve c LS Pressure From Loader Control Valve
d Output To Loader Control Valve

10-40 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD HYDRAULIC PUMP
12

b Lip Seal Ring H Positioning Piston


c Tapered Roller Bearing I Swash Plate Positioning Spring
d Centering Spring J Cylinder Block
e Tapered Roller Bearing 1) Swash Plate Positioning Piston
f Drive Shaft 1! Pump Piston
g Swash Plate 1@ Guide Shoe

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-41


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
Unit : mm
Check Item Criteria Remedy
1# Bearing Preload 0 to 0.05 Adjust

Standard Tolerance Standard Clearance


Remedy
Size Shaft Hole Clearance Limit
1$ Piston To Cylinder Backlash 20 --- 0.065
1% Piston To Shoe Backlash 0.15
1^ Drive Shaft Diameter 34.91

Standard Size Repair Limit


Free Installed Installed Free Installed Remedy
Length Length Load Length Load
1& Swash Plate Positioning Spring --- 88.7 276 12 N Replace

10-42 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD HYDRAULIC PUMP
12

POWER GOVERNOR f Pressure Cut Off Spring j Internal Spring 1# Throttles


b Spring g Pressure Cut Off Screw 1) External Spring 1$ Throttles
c Piston Rod h Initial Adjust Screw LS VALVE 1% Spool
d Bushing PC VALVE 1! External Spring
e Initial Adjust Spring i Spool 1@ Internal Spring

Unit : mm
Spring Criteria
Standard Size Repair Limit
Check Item Remedy
Install Installed Installed
Free Length Free Length
Length Load Load
1^ Piston Rod Return Spring --- --- --- --- ---
1& Internal Power Reg Spring 125.4 10 N
1* External Power Reg Spring 180.2 12 N Replace
1( External LS/PC Spring 40.2 3 N
2) Internal LS/PC Spring 81.7 14 N

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-43


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
FUNCTION
The rotation and torque transmitted to the pump shaft is converted into hydraulic energy and pressurized oil is delivered
according to the load requirements. The amount of oil delivered can be modified by changing the angle of the swash plate.

STRUCTURE
The cylinder block g is supported and connected to the shaft b by the spline a and the shaft is supported by the front and rear
tapered roller bearings.
The tip of the piston g is ball shaped. The shoe e is caulked to it to form one unit in such a way that the piston f and the shoe
together form a spherical bearing.
The swash plate d has a flat surface A and the shoe e remains pressed against this surface while sliding in a circular move-
ment. The swash plate brings highly pressurized oil onto the cylindrical surface B fashioned in the pump body c, which means
that the swash plate slides on a hydrostatically supported bearing.
The pistons f perform their relative movements in an axial direction, inside cylindrical chambers fashioned in the cylinder
block g.
The oil is brought up to pressure in the chambers of the cylinder block g by the rotatory movement of the block itself. The
areas of pressure and suction are determined by the swash plate f. The surface of the swash plate is so designed that the oil
pressure always remains within acceptable limits. The oil in each chamber is drawn in and discharged through holes in the
valve plate h.

10-44 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
OPERATION
PUMP OPERATION

1. The cylinder block g rotates together with the shaft b and the shoe
e slides on the flat surface A. The swash plate d moves along the
cylindrical surface B. The angle formed between the center line
of the shaft and the center line X of the swash plate changes, thus
modifying the axial position of the pistons in relation to the cylin-
der block. Angle is known as the swash plate angle.

2. When the center line X of the swash plate d maintains the angle
in relation to the center line of the shaft b, and hence also of the
cylinder block g, the flat surface A acts as a cam for the shoe e.
As the piston f rotates and slides inside the cylinder block, it cre-
ates a difference between the volumes C and D which provokes
intake and discharge of the oil in quantities equal to the difference
between the volumes (D - C = delivery). As the cylinder block
rotates, chamber D loses volume while the volume of chamber C is
increased, thus provoking an intake of oil. The figure indicates the
state of the pump when the intake of chamber D and the delivery of
chamber C have been completed.

3. When the center line X of the swash plate d and the center line of
the cylinder block g are perfectly aligned (the swash plate angle
= 0), the difference between the volumes C and D within the cylin-
der block becomes 0 and the pump does not take in or deliver any
oil. In practice the swash plate angle never becomes = 0. Pump
delivery is directly proportional to the swash plate angle .
CONTROL OF DELIVERY

1. As the swash plate angle grows larger, the difference between


volumes C and D increases, and the delivery Q also increases. The
swash plate angle is modified by servo pistons I and J.

2. The servo piston I moves in a reciprocating linear motion caused


by pressure signals from the PC and LS valves. The linear move-
ment is transmitted to the swash plate D, which is supported by the
cylindrical surface of the cradle C. The swash plate therefore has a
semi-circular reciprocating movement.

3. The surfaces of the servo pistons receiving the pressures PP and LS are dissimilar. The delivery pressure PP of the main
pump is always passed into the smaller (upper) pressure chamber, whereas the pressure PEN coming from the LS valve is
passed into the larger (lower) pressure chamber.
The movement of the servo piston is governed by the relationship between pressures PP and PEN, as well by the propor-
tions between the surfaces (larger and smaller) of the servo piston.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-45


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
PC VALVE, LS VALVE, SERVO PISTON

POWER GOVERNOR LS VALVE PC VALVE


b Spring D Servo Piston E Piston G Servo Piston
c Servo Piston F Spring H Spring

LS VALVE FUNCTION
The LS valve controls the pump delivery according to the stroke of the control valve level, i.e., in function of the delivery
demands made by the actuators. The LS valve detects the actuators delivery needs by means of the differential pressure PLS
existing between the pump delivery pressure PP and the pressure PLS coming from the control valve. This reading permits con-
trol of the main pump delivery Q. PP, PLS and PLS are, respectively, the pump pressure, the Load Sensing pressure, and the
difference in pressure between these two values.
The LS valve detects the pressure difference PLS generated by the passage of the oil flow through the surface freed by the
control valve spool, and controls the pump delivery Q so as to keep the pressure drop constant. Pump delivery is propor-
tional to the demands made known by the control valve.

10-46 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
OPERATION

1. When the control valve is in a NEUTRAL position.

The pressure PLS of the LS coming from the control valve outlet passes into chamber a of the spring of the LS valve. The pres-
sure PP of the pump passes into chamber b of the opposite side.
The piston rod movement e is determined by the combination of the force generated by the pressure PLS, the force of the
spring g and the force generated on the side opposite the piston rod by the pressure PP.
Before the engine is started the servo piston d is pushed to the right by the spring b, corresponding to the maximum angle
of the swash plate.
If all the control valve spools are in their NEUTRAL position when the engine is started, the pressure PLS of the LS will
remain at 4.1 to 8.16 kg/cm because no oil is flowing through the control valve. At the same time the pump pressure PP
increases and is maintained at a value of about 27.54 kg/cm.
For this reason the piston e is thrust to the right ( ) and a passage is formed between the delivery lines c and d. This
opening enables the pump pressure PP to enter chamber X of the servo piston d.
Although the pump pressure PP is always passed into chamber Y of the servo piston c, since the force exerted by that
pressure on piston d exceeds the force exerted on piston, the servo piston b moves to the right ( ), i.e. towards the side
of the minimum angle of the swash plate.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-47


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
2. When a control valve lever is activated

When the control valve lever is moved out of its NEUTRAL position, the opening f is determined, allowing an LS signal to be
generated.
Until the PLS generates a force less than the force exerted by the spring g on the spool e, the system will remain stable.
When the opening f is such as to provoke a reduction in PLS, the spool moves to the left ( ) to form a passage between deliv-
ery lines d and e. The chamber X loses pressure and the servo piston causes the swash plate to move towards maximum displace-
ment.
Equilibrium is reestablished in the system when the pressure PLS generates on the spool e the difference in force
exerted by the spring g, and the passage between delivery lines c and d is reopened.

10-48 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
3. When the control valve opening is at its maximum, lever at the end of its stroke.

When the control lever is moved to full stroke, the spool opening reaches its maximum, the difference between the pump pres-
sure PP and the LS pressure PLS becomes smaller, differential pressure PLS.
The LS pressure PLS introduced into the chamber a of the LS valve becomes about the same as the pump pressure PP and
the piston e is moved to the left ( ) by the combined forces generated by the pressure PLS and the spring g. The piston
movement closes the delivery line c and forms a passage between lines d and e.
The pressurized oil present in the chamber X of the servo cylinder D flows through the lines d and e and reaches the pump
drainage chamber, so that the pressure in chamber X of the servo cylinder B becomes equal to the drainage pressure.
The servo piston D is thus moved to the right ( ) by swash plate movement due to the pressure PP in the chamber Y of the
servo cylinder C. It is drawn in the direction of the increase in angle of the swash plate.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-49


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
4. When the spool makes very small movements, fine control.

When the control valve lever moves in very small increments towards the NEUTRAL position, when the control valve open-
ing f diminishes, the differential pressure PLS between the pump pressure PP and the LS pressure PLS increases.
If the differential pressure PLS generates on the spool e a difference in force that exceeds the force exerted by the spring g,
the spool moves to the right ( ) and a passage is formed between the delivery lines c and d. The pressure PP is introduced into
the chamber X and the swash plate moves towards its minimum angle.
When the control valve lever performs small movements towards the position of maximum opening, when the opening f
of the control valve increases, the differential pressure PLS diminishes.
If the differential pressure PLS generates on the spool e a force difference that does not exceed the force exerted by the
spring g, the spool moves to the left ( ) and a passage is formed between the delivery lines d and e. The chamber X loses
pressure and the servo piston provokes a movement of the swash plate towards maximum displacement.
Equilibrium is reestablished in the system when the pressure PLS generates on the spool e the difference in force
exerted by the spring g, and hence the passage between delivery lines c and d is also reopened.

10-50 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
5. When pump flow matches the demands of the control valve

A1 will be the surface of the servo piston d, A2 the surface of the servo piston (2), PEN the pressure acting on the piston b and
PP the pressure acting on the piston side c.
When pump delivery reaches the quantity demanded by the control valve, the pump pressure PP in chamber b of the LS
valve is in equilibrium with the combined forces of the LS pressure PLS in chamber a, and the force exerted by the spring
g. Once equilibrium has been reached the piston e stops in the central position.
In this condition the passage from chamber c to chamber d remains only slightly open in order to maintain pressure in
chamber d. A flow of oil is introduced into the servo cylinder d at a pressure that balances the force generated by the
pump pressure PP in the cylinder c. PEN x A1 = PP x A2.
The stability of the equilibrium is guaranteed by a flow stabilized by the throttle g.
The force of the spring g is regulated so that the piston e is in equilibrium when PP - PLS = PLS = 18.36 kg/cm. The
pump flow is made proportional to the section of the opening of the control valve, which maintains the differential pres-
sure. PLS = 18.36 kg/cm.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-51


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
PC VALVE FUNCTION
The PC valve performs an approximate power check, and ensures
that the hydraulic horse power absorbed by the pump does not exceed
the horse power delivered by the endothermal engine.
This is achieved by limiting the pump delivery Q in function of the
delivery pressure PP, even if the LS valve requests an increase in
delivery Q due to the larger section freed by the control valve spool,
in the presence of high pressure pump delivery.
During operation the delivery Q increases and the delivery pressure
PP also increases simultaneously, the PC valve reduces the pump
delivery Q. When the delivery pressure PP decreases, the PC valve
increases the pump flow.
The relationships between the pump delivery pressure PP and the
delivery Q are shown in the diagram.

10-52 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
Operation

1. When the load on the actuators is heavy, high pump delivery pressure

When a higher delivery is required, the LS valve receives a signal from the control valve to bring the pump up to maximum
displacement. When the swash plate moves it also moves the bushing c joined to it by the pin b, which releases the spring d.
As the pressure of the actuators increases, pressure also increases in the delivery line c. When the calibrated setting of the
spring d is reached, the piston rod e is thrust to the left ( ) and the passage between chamber b and the pump drainage
chamber a is opened.
The opening of the passage between the chambers b and a generates a flow of oil and hence, due to the calibrated hole g,
a P is generated between chambers f and g at the sides opposite the spool f. P = PP - PPC
When the value of PP exceeds the value of the spring loading h the spool f moves to the right ( ) opening the passage
between the delivery lines d and e and sending the pump pressure PP towards the servo cylinder i. The pressure PP intro-
duced into chamber X of the cylinder pushes it towards the minimum angle of the swash plate ( ).

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-53


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
2. When equilibrium has been reached

When the piston i is pushed to the left ( ) the bushing c is also moved. The oil flow between the chambers b and a is
reduced and the PPC pressure tends to approach the PP pressure value. The P decreases and the spool f is pushed to the left
( ) by the force of the spring h.
Equilibrium is reached when the force generated by the PP pressure, the force generated by the PPC pressure, and the
force of the spring h are all balanced. The force generated by PP = the force generated by the PPC + the spring force.
In this condition the passage from chamber d to chamber e remains only slightly open in order to maintain pressure in
chamber e. A flow of oil is introduced into the cylinder i at a pressure that balances the force generated by the pump
pressure PP acting on the cylinder j. PEN x A1 = PP x A2
The stability of this equilibrium is generated by a continuous stabilized flow from the throttle 1).

10-54 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
3. When the load on the actuators decreases, pump delivery pressure drops

When the load on the actuators diminishes and the pump delivery pressure PP drops, the PPC. pressure also drops.
The reduction in the PPC causes the spool e to move and the passage between chambers b, d and a is closed. The PPC
pressure and the PP pressure of the pump are equalized due to the interruption of the oil flow through the calibrated hole
g and the P becomes zero P = PP - PPC = 0.
The spring h pushes the spool f to the left ( ) closing the passage between the chambers d and e and opening the pas-
sage between chambers e and g.
The pressurized oil present in chamber X of the servo cylinder i passes through chambers e and g and reaches the pump
drainage chamber, so that the pressure in chamber X of the servo cylinder becomes equal to the drainage pressure. The
servo piston j is caused to move by the PP pressure in chamber Y of the servo cylinder, in the direction of the increase in
the angle of the swash plate.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-55


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
4. The function of the spring

The loading on the springs d and 1! of the PC valve changes in pro-


portion to the angle of inclination of the pump swash plate. The com-
pression of the spring varies with the movements of the servo piston i.
When the piston moves to the left ( ), the spring is compressed. If
the piston moves even further to the left ( ), the spring 1! comes
into action to increase the loading. The overall loading of the
springs is varied by the piston, which either compresses or releases
them.
The pump absorption torque curve, which indicates the relationship
between the pump delivery pressure PP and the delivery Q, is a
broken line. The position in which the piston i stops, the pump
absorption torque, is determined by the position in which the PPC
pressure applied to the spool e is balanced by the force exerted by
the springs d and 1!.
As pump delivery pressure PP increases, delivery Q decreases, and
as pressure PP diminishes, pump delivery Q increases.

10-56 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
WORKING MODE SOLENOID VALVE
Function

Calibration of the pump absorption torque is normally performed


for the working mode E. When the solenoid valve of the working mode
is commutated the absorbed power of the pump is increased, as indi-
cated by the working mode curve.

Operation

WORKING MODE E

During normal operation, working mode E, the PC valve intervenes when a P1 is generated equal to the loading on the
spring e.
The P1 is generated by the calibrated hole d in the spool of the PC valve c when, at a determined pump delivery pressure P1,
the valve b puts the delivery line a into discharge, thus generating a flow F1 in the delivery line a.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-57


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD HYDRAULIC PUMP
12
WORKING MODE P

When the solenoid valve g is commutated, working Mode P, the pressurized oil coming from the pump changes its route and
passes through the throttle f, which has a larger diameter than the calibrated hole d.
Because the throttle f has a larger diameter, the P2 generated is less than is needed to overcome the force generated by
the spring e. The spool of the PC valve c is therefore pushed to the left ( ) by the force of the spring. This shift obliges
the pump to increase displacement and hence the delivery.
The increase in flow causes an increment of the P2 which, when the loading value of the spring is reached, allows the
spool to shift to the right ( ).
The pump starts to work in normal fashion once again, and all the valves recommence normal functioning.

10-58 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD STEERING UNIT
12
STEERING UNIT

a. Port LS From the loader control valve


b. Port T To the hydraulic oil tank
c. Port L To the steering cylinder
d. Port D To the steering cylinder
e. Port P From the loader control valve
TECHNICAL DATA
Steering unit type .................................................LAGCSDS160P
Displacement ............................................................... 160 cc/rev.

OPERATION
The steering unit consists of a control valve and a rotating oil dis-
penser, and is of the hydrostatic type. When the steering wheel is
turned, the control valve sends oil from the pump P2, by means of
the rotating oil dispenser, to one side of the steering cylinder.
The rotating dispenser ensures that the volume of oil supplied to the
cylinder is proportionate to the angle of rotation of the steering
wheel. In the event of malfunction, the rotating oil dispenser will
function automatically as a hand pump, thus guaranteeing auxiliary
steering.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-59


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD LOADER VALVE
12
LOADER VALVE

2 SPOOL

a Port D - To the Hydraulic Steering Unit b Loader Relief Valve


b Port A2 - To the Bucket Cylinders c Plug
c Port A1 - To the Boom Cylinders d Ball
d Port LS - To the Pump e Check Valve Spring
e Port T - To the Hydraulic Oil Tank f Priority Valve Piston Rod
f Port P - From the Pump g Priority Valve Spring
g Port B1 - To the Boom Cylinders
h Port B2 - To the Bucket Cylinders
j Port DLS - To the Hydraulic Steering Unit

Unit : mm
Spring Criteria
Standard Size Repair Limit
Check Item Remedy
Free Installed Installed Free Installed
Length Length Load Length Load
h Check Valve Spring
i Priority Valve Spring

10-60 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD LOADER VALVE
12

b Port Plug G Detent Lock Ball 1! Holding Coil


c Boom Raise Spool H Compensator 1@ Check Valve Spring
d Spool Return Spring I Anti Cavitation Valve 1# Check Valve
e Spool Locking Spring J Bucket Dump Spool
f Detent Ball 1) Spool Return Spring

Unit : mm
Spring Criteria
Standard Size Repair Limit
Check Item Remedy
Free Installed Installed Free Installed
Length Length Load Length Load
1$ Spool Return Spring
1% Spool Locking Spring
1^ Spool Return Spring
1& Check Valve Spring

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-61


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD LOADER VALVE
12
3 SPOOL VALVE

a Port D - To the Hydraulic Steering Unit k Port B3 - To the Auxiliary Cylinders


b Port A3 - To the Auxiliary Cylinders m Port DLS - To the Hydraulic Steering Unit
c Port A2 - To the Bucket Cylinders b Loader Relief Valve
d Port A1 - To the Boom Cylinders c Plug
e Port LS - To the Pump d Ball
f Port T - To the Hydraulic Oil Tank e Check Valve Spring
g Port P - From the Pump f Priority Valve Piston Rod
h Port B1 - To the Boom Cylinders g Priority Valve Spring
j Port B2 - To the Bucket Cylinders

Unit : mm
Spring Criteria
Standard Size Repair Limit
Check Item Remedy
Free Installed Installed Free Installed
Length Length Load Length Load
h Check Valve Spring
i Priority Valve Spring

10-62 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD LOADER VALVE
12

b Port Plug G Detent Lock Ball 1! Holding Coil


c Boom Raise Spool H Compensator 1@ Check Valve Spring
d Spool Return Spring I Anti Cavitation Valve 1# Check Valve
e Spool Locking Spring J Bucket Dump Spool 1$ Auxiliary Spool
f Detent Ball 1) Spool Return Spring

Unit : mm
Spring Criteria
Standard Size Repair Limit
Check Item Remedy
Free Installed Installed Free Installed
Length Length Load Length Load
1% Spool Locking Spring
1^ Spool Return Spring
1& Check Valve Spring
1* Spool Return Spring

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-63


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE
12
BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE

MECHANICAL CONTROL

10-64 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE
12
A Inlet Section J Outlet Section B1 Arm Cylinder Rod
B Arm Cylinder Section A1 Arm Cylinder Barrel B2 Right Swing Cylinder Rod
C Swing Cylinder Section A2 Right Swing Cylinder Barrel B3 Right Outrigger Cylinder Rod
D Right Outrigger Cylinder Section A3 Right Outrigger Cylinder Barrel B4 Left Outrigger Cylinder Rod
E Left Outrigger Cylinder Section A4 Left Outrigger Cylinder Barrel B5 Bucket Cylinder Rod
F Bucket Cylinder Section A5 Bucket Cylinder Barrel B6 Boom Cylinder Rod
G Boom Cylinder Section A6 Boom Cylinder Barrel B7 Telescopic Arm Cylinder Rod
H Telescopic Arm Cylinder Section A7 Telescopic Arm Cylinder Barrel B8 Hammer Inlet Port
I Hammer Cylinder Section A8 Hammer Port Plugged

INLET SECTION VIEWS A-A AND B-B

a Unloading Valve C Retainer Plug E Unloading Valve


b Return Spring D Pressure Cut Out Valve

Unit : mm
Spring Criteria
Standard Size Repair Limit
Check Item Remedy
Free Installed Installed Free Installed
Length Length Load Length Load
f Return Spring Replace

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-65


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE
12
ARM SECTION VIEW C-C

a Adjustable Circuit Relief Valve D Arm Cylinder Spool g Check Valve Return Spring
b LIFD - Load Independent Flow Divider e Spool Return Spring
C Port Plug f Check Valve

Unit : mm
Spring Criteria
Standard Size Repair Limit
Check Item Remedy
Free Installed Installed Free Installed
Length Length Load Length Load
h Spool Return Spring
Replace
i Check Valve Return Spring

10-66 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE
12
SWING SECTION VIEW D-D

a Adjustable Circuit Relief Valve D Swing Cylinder Spool g Check Valve Return Spring
b LIFD - Load Independent Flow Divider e Spool Return Spring
C Adjustable Circuit Relief Valve f Check Valve

Unit : mm
Spring Criteria
Standard Size Repair Limit
Check Item Remedy
Free Installed Installed Free Installed
Length Length Load Length Load
h Spool Return Spring
Replace
i Check Valve Return Spring

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-67


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE
12
LEFT OUTRIGGER SECTION VIEW E-E

a Port Plug D Left Outrigger Cylinder Spool g Check Valve Return Spring
b LIFD - Load Independent Flow Divider e Spool Return Spring
C Port Plug f Check Valve

Unit : mm
Spring Criteria
Standard Size Repair Limit
Check Item Remedy
Free Installed Installed Free Installed
Length Length Load Length Load
h Spool Return Spring
Replace
i Check Valve Return Spring

10-68 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE
12
RIGHT OUTRIGGER SECTION VIEW F-F

a Port Plug D Right Outrigger Cylinder Spool g Check Valve Return Spring
b LIFD - Load Independent Flow Divider e Spool Return Spring
C Port Plug f Check Valve

Unit : mm
Spring Criteria
Standard Size Repair Limit
Check Item Remedy
Free Installed Installed Free Installed
Length Length Load Length Load
h Spool Return Spring
Replace
i Check Valve Return Spring

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-69


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE
12
BUCKET SECTION VIEW G-G

a Circuit Relief Valve D Bucket Cylinder Spool g Check Valve Return Spring
b LIFD - Load Independent Flow Divider e Spool Return Spring
C Adjustable Circuit Relief Valve f Check Valve

Unit : mm
Spring Criteria
Standard Size Repair Limit
Check Item Remedy
Free Installed Installed Free Installed
Length Length Load Length Load
h Spool Return Spring
Replace
i Check Valve Return Spring

10-70 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE
12
BOOM SECTION VIEW H-H

a Adjustable Circuit Relief Valve D Boom Cylinder Spool g Check Valve Return Spring
b LIFD - Load Independent Flow Divider e Spool Return Spring
C Adjustable Circuit Relief Valve f Check Valve

Unit : mm
Spring Criteria
Standard Size Repair Limit
Check Item Remedy
Free Installed Installed Free Installed
Length Length Load Length Load
h Spool Return Spring
Replace
i Check Valve Return Spring

OUTLET SECTION VIEW J-J

a Check Ball

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-71


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE
12
TELESCOPIC ARM SECTION VIEW K-K

a Port Plug D Telescopic Arm Cylinder Spool g Check Valve Return Spring
b LIFD - Load Independent Flow Divider e Spool Return Spring
C Anti Cavitation Valve f Check Valve

Unit : mm
Spring Criteria
Standard Size Repair Limit
Check Item Remedy
Free Installed Installed Free Installed
Length Length Load Length Load
h Spool Return Spring
Replace
i Check Valve Return Spring

10-72 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE
12
HAMMER SECTION VIEW L-L

a Adjustable Circuit Relief Valve D Hammer Spool g Check Valve Return Spring
b LIFD - Load Independent Flow Divider e Spool Return Spring
C Port Plug f Check Valve

Unit : mm
Spring Criteria
Standard Size Repair Limit
Check Item Remedy
Free Installed Installed Free Installed
Length Length Load Length Load
h Spool Return Spring
Replace
i Check Valve Return Spring

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-73


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE
12
EXCAVATOR CONTROL

10-74 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE
12
A Inlet Section J Outlet Section B1 Arm Cylinder Rod
B Arm Cylinder Section A1 Arm Cylinder Barrel B2 Right Swing Cylinder Rod
C Swing Cylinder Section A2 Right Swing Cylinder Barrel B3 Right Outrigger Cylinder Rod
D Right Outrigger Cylinder Section A3 Right Outrigger Cylinder Barrel B4 Left Outrigger Cylinder Rod
E Left Outrigger Cylinder Section A4 Left Outrigger Cylinder Barrel B5 Bucket Cylinder Rod
F Bucket Cylinder Section A5 Bucket Cylinder Barrel B6 Boom Cylinder Rod
G Boom Cylinder Section A6 Boom Cylinder Barrel B7 Telescopic Arm Cylinder Rod
H Telescopic Arm Cylinder Section A7 Telescopic Arm Cylinder Barrel B8 Hammer Inlet Port
I Hammer Cylinder Section A8 Hammer Port Plugged

INLET SECTION VIEWS A-A AND B-B

a Unloading Valve C Retainer Plug E Unloading Valve


b Return Spring D Pressure Cut Out Valve

Unit : mm
Spring Criteria
Standard Size Repair Limit
Check Item Remedy
Free Installed Installed Free Installed
Length Length Load Length Load
f Return Spring Replace

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-75


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE
12
ARM SECTION VIEW C-C

a Adjustable Circuit Relief Valve D Arm Cylinder Spool g Check Valve Return Spring
b LIFD - Load Independent Flow Divider e Spool Return Spring
C Port Plug f Check Valve

Unit : mm
Spring Criteria
Standard Size Repair Limit
Check Item Remedy
Free Installed Installed Free Installed
Length Length Load Length Load
h Spool Return Spring
Replace
i Check Valve Return Spring

10-76 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE
12
SWING SECTION VIEW D-D

a Adjustable Circuit Relief Valve D Swing Cylinder Spool g Check Valve Return Spring
b LIFD - Load Independent Flow Divider e Spool Return Spring
C Adjustable Circuit Relief Valve f Check Valve

Unit : mm
Spring Criteria
Standard Size Repair Limit
Check Item Remedy
Free Installed Installed Free Installed
Length Length Load Length Load
h Spool Return Spring
Replace
i Check Valve Return Spring

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-77


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE
12
LEFT OUTRIGGER SECTION VIEW E-E

a Port Plug D Left Outrigger Cylinder Spool g Check Valve Return Spring
b LIFD - Load Independent Flow Divider e Spool Return Spring
C Port Plug f Check Valve

Unit : mm
Spring Criteria
Standard Size Repair Limit
Check Item Remedy
Free Installed Installed Free Installed
Length Length Load Length Load
h Spool Return Spring
Replace
i Check Valve Return Spring

10-78 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE
12
RIGHT OUTRIGGER SECTION VIEW F-F

a Port Plug D Right Outrigger Cylinder Spool g Check Valve Return Spring
b LIFD - Load Independent Flow Divider e Spool Return Spring
C Port Plug f Check Valve

Unit : mm
Spring Criteria
Standard Size Repair Limit
Check Item Remedy
Free Installed Installed Free Installed
Length Length Load Length Load
h Spool Return Spring
Replace
i Check Valve Return Spring

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-79


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE
12
BUCKET SECTION VIEW G-G

a Adjustable Circuit Relief Valve D Bucket Cylinder Spool g Check Valve Return Spring
b LIFD - Load Independent Flow Divider e Spool Return Spring
C Adjustable Circuit Relief Valve f Check Valve

Unit : mm
Spring Criteria
Standard Size Repair Limit
Check Item Remedy
Free Installed Installed Free Installed
Length Length Load Length Load
h Spool Return Spring
Replace
i Check Valve Return Spring

10-80 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE
12
BOOM SECTION VIEW H-H

a Adjustable Circuit Relief Valve D Boom Cylinder Spool g Check Valve Return Spring
b LIFD - Load Independent Flow Divider e Spool Return Spring
C Adjustable Circuit Relief Valve f Check Valve

Unit : mm
Spring Criteria
Standard Size Repair Limit
Check Item Remedy
Free Installed Installed Free Installed
Length Length Load Length Load
h Spool Return Spring
Replace
i Check Valve Return Spring

OUTLET SECTION VIEW J-J

a Check Ball

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-81


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE
12
TELESCOPIC ARM SECTION VIEW K-K

a Port Plug D Telescopic Arm Cylinder Spool g Check Valve Return Spring
b LIFD - Load Independent Flow Divider e Spool Return Spring
C Anti Cavitation Valve f Check Valve

Unit : mm
Spring Criteria
Standard Size Repair Limit
Check Item Remedy
Free Installed Installed Free Installed
Length Length Load Length Load
h Spool Return Spring
Replace
i Check Valve Return Spring

10-82 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE
12
HAMMER SECTION VIEW L-L

a Adjustable Circuit Relief Valve D Hammer Spool g Check Valve Return Spring
b LIFD - Load Independent Flow Divider e Spool Return Spring
C Port Plug f Check Valve

Unit : mm
Spring Criteria
Standard Size Repair Limit
Check Item Remedy
Free Installed Installed Free Installed
Length Length Load Length Load
h Spool Return Spring
Replace
i Check Valve Return Spring

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-83


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD CLSS
12
CLSS

CHARACTERISTICS
The term CLSS means Closed Center Load Sensing System, which has
the following characteristics:
High precision control that is independent of the load applied to the
movement;
High precision control of digging action even during delicate
manoeuvres.
Ability to perform complex operations, guaranteed by control of oil
flow in function of the aperture surfaces of the shuttles.
Energy savings guaranteed by control of pump delivery.

STRUCTURE
The CLSS system includes the variable flow pump, the control
valve and the working equipment.
The pump includes the main pump, the PC valve and the LS valve.

10-84 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD CLSS
12
OPERATING PRINCIPLES
1. Control of the angle of the pumping plate.
The angle of the swash plate and the pump delivery, is controlled in such a way that the differential pressure PLS
between the delivery pressure PP of the pump and the pressure PLS at the outlet of the control valve towards the actuator is
maintained at a constant value. PLS = pump delivery pressure PP minus pressure PLS of delivery to the actuator.
If the differential pressure PLS becomes lower than the set pressure of the LS valve, the angle of the swash plate
increases, delivery increasing.
If the differential pressure PLS increases, the angle of the swash plate decreases.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-85


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD CLSS
12
2. Pressure compensation control.
The pressure compensation valves are installed downstream from the control valve in order to balance the differential
pressure between the loads.
When two or more movements (cylinders) are activated simultaneously, the pressure differences P between the delivery
at the control valve inlet and outlets of the control valve are compensated by these valves. This will obtain the distri-
bution of the pump flow in proportion to the areas of passage S1 and S2 of each valve.

10-86 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD CLSS
12
UNLOADING VALVE
FUNCTION

1. When the control valve is in the NEUTRAL position, the flow of the pump, due to the swash plate being in the minimum
angle position, is sent to the control valve. In these conditions, the pump delivery pressure PP is regulated to 27.5 kg/cm
by the spring a inside the valve. PP = PLS + spring load with PLS = 6.1 kg/cm

OPERATION
When the control valve is in the NEUTRAL position
On the two surfaces of the shuttle b, the pump pressure PP acts on the right side, while the LS signal with pressure PLS
acts on the left side.
Because a LS signal is generated with a pressure PLS 6.1 2 kg/cm, when the control valve is in the NEUTRAL position,
the pump delivery pressure PP is regulated by the combination of the pressure provided by the spring and by the LS pres-
sure PLS.
While the pump delivery pressure PP increases until it compensates for the loading on the spring a and for the LS pres-
sure 27.5 kg/cm, the shuttle b moves to the left ( ) and the PP circuit is put into communication with the tank circuit T.
This system ensures that the pump delivery pressure PP stays regulated at 27.5 kg/cm.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-87


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD CLSS
12
1. If, during the precision regulations of the control valve, the request for oil flow to the actuators in equal or less than the
delivery values given by the minimum angle of the swash plate, the pump delivery pressure PP is regulated by the pres-
sure PLS + 21.5 kg/cm. Because the unloading valve opens when the differential pressure between the pump delivery
pressure PP and the PLS LS pressure becomes equivalent to the loading of the spring a (21.5 kg/cm), the differential LS
pressure PLS LS becomes 21.5 kg/cm.

Final control of control valve


When final control are performed with the control valve, a pressure PLS is generated that pressurizes the spring chamber,
acts on the left extremity of the valve b. The actuator pressure is introduced into the LS circuit and then into the spring
chamber. As a result, the pump pressure PP tends to increase.
When the differential pressure between the pump delivery pressure PP and the LS pressure PLS has the same value as the
loading on the spring a (21.5 kg/cm), the shuttle b moves to the left ( ) and the pump circuit PP puts itself into commu-
nication with the tank circuit T. The exceeding pump delivery, relative to the actuator request, is sent to the tank circuit.
The pump delivery pressure PP is regulated by the combination of the pressure provided by the spring (21.5 kg/cm) and
by the LS pressure PLS, i.e. when the pressure differential PLS reaches the value of 21.5 kg/cm.

10-88 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD CLSS
12
2. When the request for oil flow from the actuators exceeds the minimum delivery of the pump during use of the control
valve, the connection to the tank circuit is eliminated and all the pump delivery is sent to the actuators.

When the control valve is in use


When the control valve shuttle is operated to execute a bigger stroke, the opening section of spool becomes bigger and
consequently the controlled delivery. Because the control valve passage is large, the difference between the LS pressure
PLS and the pump delivery pressure PP is reduced to 18.4 kg/cm, LS pump valve setting.
Because the differential pressure between the pump delivery pressure PP and the LS pressure PLS is not equal to the
pressure given by the spring loading a (21.5 kg/cm), the shuttle b is pushed to the right ( ) of the spring.
The result is that the connection between the pump delivery circuit PP and the tank circuit T is excluded and the entire
pump delivery is sent to the actuators.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-89


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD CLSS
12
INTRODUCTION OF THE LS PRESSURE
The LS pressure is the pressure generated by external forces acting on the actuators at the outlet of the control valve.

OPERATION
When the spool b is activated, pump pressure PP starts to flow into the actuator circuit A through chamber b.
At the same time the compensator c moves upwards ( ) so that the flow controlled by spool b can flow towards the actu-
ator A. Check valve a do not allow any flow up to when pressure in chamber c is higher than pressure in chamber b. Pres-
sure downstream of the spool flows in the PLS circuit downstream the compensator valve through the orifice d.
The PLS circuit of the LS is thus in communication with the tank circuit T by means of the LS decompression valve d.
The system stabilizes when a pressure difference of 18.4 kg/cm is generated across the spool b between pump pressure
PP and PLS pressure.

10-90 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD CLSS
12
DELIVERY COMPENSATION
INTRODUCTION
The flow sent to each actuator is controlled by the opening area of each spool. While performing complex control, in tradi-
tional control valves the difference between actuators pressure might cause sudden and unexpected movements acceleration in
those actuators operated at lower pressure. The adoption of the pressure compensation valve allow to control those situation
guarantying the proportionality between each actuator. Compensation of actuator deliveries occurs when, during the simulta-
neous activation of two or more movements, the pressure of one actuator drops lower than that of the other, and pump delivery,
if not controlled, tends to be supplied the actuator operating at lower. In the diagram the actuator on the left is requesting
higher pressure.

OPERATION

1. When activating an actuator at a pressure lower than the one already working. While operating actuator A starts operating
actuator B.
Until the pressure PBV downstream from the shuttle b reaches the same value requested by actuator B, no oil passes.
When the pressure requested by actuator B is exceeded, movement can commence. This creates a flow that adding to the
one controlled by spool d reduces the pressure upstream of spool b and d and therefore the P between PLS and PP.
The pump compares the delivery pressures PP and PLS and senses that the difference P<18.4 kg/cm. This variation in
P causes an increase in oil flow increasing the swash plate angle. Until the pump realizes a P of 18.4 kg/cm, i.e. until the
increase in oil flow compensates the requirements of the two actuators, the pump will continue to increase delivery.
P of 18.4 kg/cm, will stabilize as soon as it is restored to. The compensator C is moved upwards by the oil flow and stops
when the aperture between the chambers a and b reduces the passage sufficiently to reduce the pressure in chamber b to
be sent to the actuator.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-91


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD CLSS
12
2. When a low pressure actuator needs to work at a higher pressure than the other

If the actuator B needs to work at a higher pressure, PB>PA, the pressure PB will start to increase.
Since pressure PB is increasing, the compensator c moves upwards to restore the P between the chambers a and b, and
therefore the P does not vary upstream or downstream from the shuttle b.
When pressure PB exceeds pressure PA the compensator c is fully open and the pressure PB is introduced into the LS
circuit.
The increased pressure in the LS circuit obliges the pump to increase delivery until the P is restored to 18.4 kg/cm.
Simultaneously the increase in pressure upstream from the shuttle d generates an increase in P upstream and downstream
from the shuttle. (PAV<PLS<PP)
Because the pressure PLS which is equal to the pressure PB acts on the upper side of the compensator a, and since the
pressure PAV is lower, the compensator is pushed downwards.
The compensator stops when the aperture between the chambers c and d generates a reduction of the passage sufficient to
reduce the pressure to be sent to the actuator, and to increase the pressure PAV until the P is restored to the 18.4 kg/cm
necessary for equilibrium.

10-92 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD CLSS
12
3. When an increase in delivery is required by an actuator

When an increased delivery is required by actuator A, i.e. when the shuttle d is asked to execute a bigger movement, the
section of the aperture increases.
The increase in aperture provokes a drop in P between the two sides of the shuttles b and d, because the flow, which has
remained unchanged until now, is divided between both the actuators.
At the same time the pump senses the variation in P and increases the oil flow until the P is restored to P of 18.4 kg/cm
between the two sides of the shuttle d and the compensator a changes position in order to restore the P upstream and
downstream from the shuttle d.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-93


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD CLSS
12
LIFD CONTROL SYSTEM
FUNCTION
The Load Independence Flow Divider, LIFD, intervenes automatically when the oil flow requested by the actuators
exceeds the maximum delivery guaranteed by the pump. In this case, the oil flow is divided between the various actuators
in proportion to their requirements.

OPERATION
When, during the simultaneous operation of more than one actuator, one of them needs a higher pressure and the charac-
teristics of the pump are exceeded, the pump guarantees a delivery limited by its calibration curve. At this point less oil
than requested is distributed to all the actuators.
Because the sections of the apertures remain unchanged, the pressure upstream and downstream from the shuttles drops.
Since the position of the compensator e is determined by the pressure of the LS signal, by the pressure PBV downstream
from the shuttle d and by the flow of oil needed for the movement, the compensator is pushed downwards by the higher
pressure in the upper chamber until the pressure PBV downstream from the shuttle becomes equal to the pressure PAV
downstream from the shuttle b. This equalizes the pressure P of the shuttle.
Thus the flow of each actuator is reduced by a percentage equal to the reduction or absence of pump delivery. When the
request for performance is excessive, the system can nevertheless guarantee proportionality and gradually for the move-
ments in any load conditions.
If an increase in delivery is requested, rather than an increase in pressure, and the characteristics of the pump are
exceeded, the system will function in the same way as described for the above case.

10-94 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD CLSS
12
LS DECOMPRESSION VALVE
DESCRIPTION
The LS decompression valve is a throttle that continuously releases a
small quantity of oil from the LS circuit and that, when the shuttles are
brought back to a neutral position, releases the residual LS pressure.
This continued flow renders the PLS pressure increment more gentle
and gradual, and increases stability and control during the phases of
reducing the LS pressure.
OPERATION
When the LS pressure reaches chamber a of the valve, it generates
a force that opposes the force of the spring a.
Until the force generated by the LS pressure exceeds the force of
the spring a (LS pressure low) the shuttle b remains at rest and oil
flows through the calibrated orifice b in the tank circuit.
When the force generated by the LS pressure exceeds the force of
the spring a, the shuttle is pushed upwards ( ) and the passages c
are closed. Oil continues to flow into the chamber d until the force
generated by the pressure contained in chamber d, together with the
force of the spring, exceeds the force generated by the LS pressure.
The shuttle is pushed downwards ( ) and passage c is opened. The
system is in equilibrium, i.e. the shuttle is at rest, when the quantity
of oil allowed to flow into the tank circuit is equivalent to the quan-
tity that generates a pressure difference P such that PLS x S =
[PLS1 x S + F] where: PLS = LS pressure
PLS1 = LS pressure contained in chamber d
S = Section of the shuttle
F = Force of the spring

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-95


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD CLSS
12
PRESSURE CUT OFF VALVE
DESCRIPTION
The function of the pressure cut off valve is to regulate the maximum
pressure of the LS signal and hence also the pressure of the pump.
OPERATION
The pressurized oil of the LS reaches the chamber a of the valve.
When the force generated by the LS pressure on the valve b
exceeds the force of the spring a, the valve is pushed upwards ( )
opening the passage between the chamber a and the tank circuit.

10-96 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD CLSS
12
PRIORITY VALVE
FUNCTION
The function of the priority valve is to distribute oil to the steering unit and to the other hydraulic components. Distribution is
determined by the position of the valve of the priority valve in function of the LS signal, oil delivery from the pump, the pres-
sure of the steering unit and the pressure of the hydraulic circuit. The position of the valve is such as to guarantee that delivery
to the steering unit will always correspond to the actual need.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-97


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD PPC JOYSTICK
12
PPC JOYSTICK

LEFT VALVE

a Port 1 To Backhoe Arm Control Valve - Crowd In .................................... Port PA1


b Port T To Hydraulic Tank
c Port 4 To Backhoe Swing Control Valve - Right ....................................... Port PB2
d Port 3 To Backhoe Arm Control Valve - Crowd Out.................................. Port PB1
e Port P To Solenoid Valve Group - ST2 ..................................................... Port S1
f Port 2 To Backhoe Swing Control Valve - Left.......................................... Port PA2

10-98 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD PPC JOYSTICK
12
RIGHT VALVE

a Port 1 To Backhoe Boom Control Valve - Lower ...................................... Port PA6


b Port T To Hydraulic Tank
c Port 4 To Backhoe Bucket Control Valve - Dump..................................... Port PA5
d Port 3 To Backhoe Boom Control Valve - Raise....................................... Port PB6
e Port P To Solenoid Valve Group - ST2 ..................................................... Port S1
f Port 2 To Backhoe Bucket Control Valve - Curl........................................ Port PB5

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-99


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD SOLENOID VALVE
12
SOLENOID VALVE

DIFFERENTIAL LOCK - BACKHOE BOOM LOCK

A EV4 Backhoe Boom Lock


B EV3 Differential Lock
a Port T To the Transmission
b Port 1 Boom Lock Cylinder
c Port 2 To the Rear Axle
d Port P From the Transmission

10-100 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD SOLENOID VALVE
12
PPC SUPPLY VALVE - ST2

A Y14 PPC Valve a ACC Accumulator


B Y23 Right Outrigger Lower b P To Backhoe Control Valve Port M
c Y16 Right Outrigger Raise c S1 To PPC Valve Port P
d Y24 Left Outrigger Raise d A1 To Backhoe Right Outrigger Valve Port PA4
e Y15 Left Outrigger Lower e A2 To Backhoe Left Outrigger Valve Port PA3
f B2 To Backhoe Left Outrigger Valve Port PB3
g B1 To Backhoe Right Outrigger Valve Port PB4
h T To Hydraulic Tank

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-101


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD SOLENOID VALVE
12
PPC TELESCOPIC ARM

A Y22 Telescopic Arm Retract a A To Backhoe Control Valve Port PA7


B Y21 Telescopic Arm Extend b B To Backhoe Control Valve Port PB7
c P To PPC Supply Valve ST2 Port S1
d T To Hydraulic Tank

10-102 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD SOLENOID VALVE
12
PPC HAMMER

A Y20 Hammer a A To Backhoe Control Valve Port PA8


b P To PPC Supply Valve ST2 Port S1
T To Hydraulic Tank and Backhoe Control
c
Valve Port PB8

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-103


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD SOLENOID VALVE
12
PPC ARM AND HAMMER

A Hammer a T To Hyd. Tank and Control Valve Port PB7


B Y22 Telescopic Arm Retract b B To PPC Supply Valve ST2 Port S1
c Y21 Telescopic Arm Extend c A1 To Backhoe Control Valve Port PB7
d B1 To Backhoe Control Valve Port PA7
e A To Backhoe Control Valve Port PA8

10-104 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD LOADER CYLINDERS
12
LOADER CYLINDERS

BOOM ARM

A Piston Rod Bushing D Piston Retaining Nut G Cylinder Rod


B Barrel Bushing E Four Piece Piston Seal H Cylinder Head
C Cylinder Barrel F Cylinder Piston

Unit : mm
Criteria
Check Item Standard Tolerance Standard Clearance Remedy
Size Shaft Hole Clearance Limit
49.975 50.15 0.175
i Piston Rod to Head 50 Replace
49.950 50.25 0.300
44.950 45.08 0.13
j Piston Rod Bushing and Pin 45
44.911 45.24 0.33 Replace pin
49.950 50.08 0.13 and bushing
1) Barrel Bushing and Pin 50
49.911 50.24 0.33

CHARACTERISTICS
Unit : mm
Piston Rod Diameter 50
Max Cylinder Length 1880
Cylinder Barrel Bore 85
Min Cylinder Length 1150
Piston Stroke 730
Rod Thread for Piston Nut 55

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-105


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD LOADER CYLINDERS
12
BUCKET

A Piston Rod Bushing D Piston Retaining Nut G Cylinder Rod


B Barrel Bushing E Four Piece Piston Seal H Cylinder Head
C Cylinder Barrel F Cylinder Piston

Unit : mm
Check Item Criteria Remedy
Standard Tolerance Standard Clearance
Size Shaft Hole Clearance Limit
Piston Rod to Head 50 49.975 50.15 0.175 Replace
i 49.950 50.25 0.300
Piston Rod Bushing and Pin 45 44.950 45.08 0.13 Replace pin
j 44.911 45.24 0.33 and bushing
Barrel Bushing and Pin 50 49.950 50.08 0.13
1) 49.911 50.24 0.33

CHARACTERISTICS
Unit: mm
Piston Rod Diameter 50
Max Cylinder Length 2145
Cylinder Barrel Bore 85
Min Cylinder Length 1390
Piston Stroke 755
Rod Thread for Piston Nut 55

10-106 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD LOADER CYLINDERS
12
MP BUCKET

A Piston Rod Bushing D Cylinder Piston G Cylinder Barrel


B Cylinder Rod E Four Piece Piston Seal
C Cylinder Head F Piston Retaining Pin
CHARACTERISTICS
Unit : mm
Piston Rod Diameter 45
Max Cylinder Length 705
Cylinder Barrel Bore 80
Min Cylinder Length 450
Piston Stroke 230

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-107


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD BACKHOE CYLINDERS
12
BACKHOE CYLINDERS

BOOM

A Piston Rod Bushing E Four Piece Piston Seal i Set Screw


B Barrel Bushing F Cylinder Piston j Stop Pin
C Cylinder Barrel G Cylinder Rod 1) Check Valve
D Stop Ball H Cylinder Head 1! Check Valve Spring

Unit : mm
Criteria
Check Item Standard Tolerance Standard Clearance Remedy
Size Shaft Hole Clearance Limit
59.970 60.030 0.060
1@ Piston Rod to Head 60 Replace
59.924 60.076 0.152
49.950 50.08 0.13
1# Piston Rod Bushing and Pin 50
49.911 50.24 0.33 Replace pin
49.950 50.08 0.13 and bushing
1$ Barrel Bushing and Pin 50
49.911 50.24 0.33

Spring Criteria
Standard Size Repair Limit
Check Item Remedy
Free Installed Installed Free Installed
Length Length Load Length Load
1% Check Valve Spring 35 Replace

CHARACTERISTICS
Unit: mm
Piston Rod Diameter 60
Max Cylinder Length 2050
Cylinder Barrel Bore 120
Min Cylinder Length 1200
Piston Stroke 850
Rod Thread for Piston 41

10-108 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD BACKHOE CYLINDERS
12
ARM

A Piston Rod Bushing D Piston Retaining Nut G Cylinder Rod


B Barrel Bushing E Four Piece Piston Seal H Cylinder Head
C Cylinder Barrel F Cylinder Piston i Piston Spacer

Unit : mm
Criteria
Check Item Standard Tolerance Standard Clearance Remedy
Size Shaft Hole Clearance Limit
44.950 45.08 0.13
j Piston Rod Bushing and Pin 45
44.911 45.24 0.33 Replace pin
49.950 50.08 0.13 and bushing
1) Barrel Bushing and Pin 50
49.911 50.24 0.33
59.970 60.030 0.060
1! Piston Rod to Head 60 Replace
59.924 60.076 0.152

CHARACTERISTICS
Unit: mm
Piston Rod Diameter 60
Max Cylinder Length 2175
Cylinder Barrel Bore 110
Min Cylinder Length 1255
Piston Stroke 920
Rod Thread for Piston Nut 36

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-109


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD BACKHOE CYLINDERS
12
BUCKET

A Piston Rod Bushing D Piston Retaining Nut G Cylinder Rod


B Barrel Bushing E Four Piece Piston Seal H Cylinder Head
C Cylinder Barrel F Cylinder Piston

Unit : mm
Criteria Remedy
Check Item Standard Tolerance Standard Clearance
Size Shaft Hole Clearance Limit
59.970 60.030 0.060 Replace
i Piston Rod to Head 60
59.924 60.076 0.152
44.950 45.08 0.13 Replace pin
j Piston Rod Bushing and Pin 45
44.911 45.24 0.33 and bushing
49.950 50.08 0.13
1) Barrel Bushing and Pin 50
49.911 50.24 0.33

CHARACTERISTICS
Unit: mm
Piston Rod Diameter 60
Max Cylinder Length 1850
Cylinder Barrel Bore 95
Min Cylinder Length 1085
Piston Stroke 765

10-110 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD BACKHOE CYLINDERS
12
TELESCOPIC ARM CYLINDER

A Piston Rod Bushing D Wear Rings G Cylinder Rod


B Barrel Bushing E Piston Seal H Cylinder Head
C Cylinder Barrel F Cylinder Piston

Unit : mm
Criteria
Check Item Standard Tolerance Standard Clearance Remedy
Size Shaft Hole Clearance Limit
39.975 40.025 0.050
i Piston Rod to Head 40 Replace
39.936 40.064 0.128
39.950 40.08 0.13
j Piston Rod Bushing and Pin 40
39.911 40.24 0.33 Replace pin
39.950 40.08 0.13 and bushing
1) Barrel Bushing and Pin 40
39.911 40.24 0.33

CHARACTERISTICS
Unit: mm
Piston Rod Diameter 40
Max Cylinder Length 2590
Cylinder Barrel Bore 70
Min Cylinder Length 1450
Piston Stroke 1140

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-111


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD BACKHOE CYLINDERS
12
SWING

A Piston Rod Bushing D Cushion Valve G Retaining Screw


B Cylinder Rod E Piston Seal H Cylinder Head
C Cylinder Barrel F Cylinder Piston

Unit : mm
Criteria
Check Item Standard Tolerance Standard Clearance Remedy
Size Shaft Hole Clearance Limit
49.970 50.025 0.055
i Piston Rod to Head 50 Replace
49.924 50.064 0.140
49.950 49.881 - 0.069 Replace pin
j Piston Rod Bushing and Pin 50
49.911 49.950 - 0.039 and bushing
45.050 44.975 - 0.075
1) Inner Bushing and Cylinder 45
45.034 45.000 - 0.034
54.950 55.000 0.050
1! Inner Bushing and Outer Bushing 55 Replace
54.911 55.046 0.135
65.060 65.000 - 0.060
1@ Outer Bushing and Frame 65
65.041 65.046 - 0.005

CHARACTERISTICS
Unit: mm
Piston Rod Diameter 50
Max Cylinder Length 678
Cylinder Barrel Bore 115
Min Cylinder Length 446.5
Piston Stroke 231.5

10-112 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD BACKHOE CYLINDERS
12
OUTRIGGER

A Piston Rod Bushing D Retarder Pin G Cylinder Rod


B Barrel Bushing E Piston Seal H Cylinder Head
C Cylinder Barrel F Cylinder Piston

Unit : mm
Criteria
Check Item Standard Tolerance Standard Clearance Remedy
Size Shaft Hole Clearance Limit
54.97 55.030 0.060
i Piston Rod to Head 55 Replace
54.94 55.076 0.136
44.950 45.08 0.13
j Piston Rod Bushing and Pin 45
44.911 45.24 0.33 Replace pin
44.950 45.08 0.13 and bushing
1) Barrel Bushing and Pin 45
44.911 45.24 0.33

CHARACTERISTICS
Unit: mm
Piston Rod Diameter 55
Max Cylinder Length 1365
Cylinder Barrel Bore 110
Min Cylinder Length 850
Piston Stroke 515

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-113


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD BACKHOE CYLINDERS
12
BOOM LOCK CYLINDER

A Cylinder Rod c Piston and Seal d Cylinder Barrel


B Cylinder Head and Seal

10-114 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD FRONT WORK EQUIPMENT
12
FRONT WORK EQUIPMENT

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-115


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD FRONT WORK EQUIPMENT
12
Unit : mm
Criteria
Check Item Standard Tolerance Standard Clearance Remedy
Size Shaft Hole Clearance Limit
44.950 45.08 0.130
a Bucket/Arm Bushing and Pin 45
44.911 45.24 0.329
44.950 45.08 0.130
b Lever/Arm Bushing and Pin 45
44.911 45.24 0.329
44.950 45.080 0.130
c Lever/Cylinder Bushing and Pin 45 Replace
44.911 45.119 0.208
44.950 45.080 0.130
d Cylinder/Arm Bushing and Pin 45
44.911 45.119 0.208
49.962 50.08 0.118
e Arm/Frame Bushing and Pin 50
49.917 50.24 0.323

10-116 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD REAR WORK EQUIPMENT
12
REAR WORK EQUIPMENT

Unit : mm
Criteria
Check Item Standard Tolerance Standard Clearance Remedy
Size Shaft Hole Clearance Limit
64.940 65.190 0.25
a Top Swing Pin and Bushing 65
64.894 65.264 0.37
64.940 65.190 0.25
b Bottom Swing Pin and Bushing 65
64.894 65.264 0.37
39.950 40.08 0.130
c Bucket/Arm Pin and Bushing 40
39.911 40.24 0.329
39.950 40.08 0.130
d Bucket/Link Pin and Bushing 40
39.911 40.24 0.329
44.950 45.08 0.130
e Link/Arm Pin and Bushing 45
44.911 45.24 0.329
Replace
44.950 45.08 0.130
f Link/Cylinder Pin and Bushing 45
44.911 45.24 0.329
49.950 50.000 0.050
g Boom/Arm Pin and Bushing 50
49.911 50.062 0.151
49.950 50.000 0.050
h Swing/Boom Pin and Bushing 50
49.911 50.062 0.151
44.950 45.08 0.130
i Outrigger/Frame Pin and Bushing 45
44.911 45.24 0.329
44.950 45.2 0.250
j Outrigger/Pad Pin and Bushing 45
44.911 45.3 0.389

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-117


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD REAR WORK EQUIPMENT
12

10-118 WB140-2N WB150-2N


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD AIR CONDITIONING
12
AIR CONDITIONING

A Magnetic Clutch E Safety Pressure Switch I Cab Air Circulation Fan


B Compressor F Expansion Valve J Air Conveyor
C Condenser G Evaporator
D Dryer Filter Tank H Clutch Control Sensor

WB140-2N WB150-2N 10-119


STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND
MAINTENANCE STANDARD AIR CONDITIONING

The compressor b is driven directly by the engine shaft by means of a


12
belt, and made to rotate by a pulley fitted with an electromagnetically
engaged clutch a. A thermostatic sensor h controls the engagement
and disengagement of the clutch. It disengages the clutch when the
evaporator reaches the lower temperature limit and engages when the
evaporator reaches the upper temperature limit.
The coolant fluid, in gaseous phase is drawn into the compressor where
it is subjected to compression and an intense heating process. In these
conditions the fluid is then sent into the condenser c where, due to the
heat extracted by ambient temperature air flowing over fins, it reaches
condensation temperature, and passes into a high pressure liquid state.
Subsequently the coolant passes into the dryer filter group d which per-
forms three functions: it filters out impurities, absorbs any moisture
present in the circuit and, finally, also functions as a reserve tank. The
coolant in its liquid state is then transferred to the evaporator G, first
passing through an expansion valve F. The task of this valve is the con-
stant metering of the quantity of fluid in order to maintain optimum
evaporation. In the evaporator the coolant fluid is subjected to expan-
sion, bringing it up to the critical evaporation point at a temperature of
approximately -8C.
The air flow generated by the centrifugal fan I which passes through
the evaporator G at ambient temperature is considerably warmer than -
8C. For this reason it yields heat to the coolant fluid, bringing it up to
boiling point and complete evaporation. On leaving the evaporator G
the coolant is drawn once more into the compressor d and a new cycle
commences. The yielding of heat from the atmosphere in which the
evaporator is positioned leads to the condensation of the water sus-
pended in the air, and hence to dehumidification. The condensate is
deposited on the evaporator fins where, if a temperature higher than 0C
is not maintained, it freezes and inhibits the functioning of the evapora-
tor. The task of keeping the temperature of the evaporator above 0C,
and thus within the optimum limits for heat exchange, is entrusted to a
thermostatic sensor H.
The condensate that forms on the evaporator fins G also contains dust,
pollens and particles suspended in the air. Continual condensation there-
fore effectively purifies the air, and the droplets of condensate are dis-
charged to the exterior. A fixed quantity of anti freeze oil is also
introduced into the circuit, with the function of lubricating all the
mechanical parts of the unit. A percentage of this oil circulates con-
stantly throughout the unit in nebulized form, lubricating the compres-
sor, pistons and bearings and the expansion valve. A pressure switch E
has been inserted in the electrical control circuit to protect the unit in the
case of a lack of coolant fluid or if the quantity becomes insufficient due
to leakages. This switch will inhibit the engagement of the electromag-
netic clutch and hence the functioning of the air conditioning unit.

10-120 WB140-2N WB150-2N


20 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND
TROUBLESHOOTING

STANDARD VALUE TABLES FOR ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-4


STANDARD VALUE TABLES FOR CHASSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-6
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-25
ENGINE SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-27
TIER I ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-27
TIER II ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-27
VALVE CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-28
TIER I ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-28
ADJUSTING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-28
VALVE COVER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-28
TIER II ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-29
ADJUSTING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-29
COMPRESSION PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-33
TIER I ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-33
TIER II ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-34
FUEL INJECTION TIMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-36
TIER I ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-36
TIER II ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-37
FAN BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-40
TENSION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-40
TENSION ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-40
COMPRESSOR DRIVE BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-41
CHECKING TENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-41
TENSION ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-41
ACCELERATOR PEDAL AND LEVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-42
ACCELERATOR PEDAL TRAVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-42
ACCELERATOR LEVER TRAVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-43
BRAKE PEDAL TRAVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-44
TIER I ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-44
MASTER CYLINDER ROD ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-44
MICROSWITCHES ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-44
CHECKING ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-44
TIER II ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-45
MASTER CYLINDER ROD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-45
CHECKING ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-45
BLEEDING AIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-46
HYDRAULIC PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-46
CYLINDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-46
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-47
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK PRESSURIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-47

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-1


TESTING AND ADJUSTING TABLE OF CONTENTS

WORK CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-47


BRAKE CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-47
CHECK BRAKE CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-48
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-49
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-49
LOADER CONTROL VALVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-50
BACKHOE CONTROLS STYLE VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-51
EXCAVATOR CONTROLS STYLE VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-53
MAIN RELIEF VALVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-55
TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-55
LOADER CONTROL VALVE (2 OR 3 SPOOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-55
BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE (6, 7 OR 8 SPOOLS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-55
SETTING RELIEF PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-55
LOADER CIRCUIT RELIEF VALVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-57
TESTING PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-57
SETTING PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-58
BACKHOE CIRCUIT RELIEF VALVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-59
TESTING PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-59
SETTING PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-60
UNLOADING VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-61
TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-61
ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-61
LOAD SENSING (LS) VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-62
TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-62
ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-62
FLOW VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-63
PRIORITY VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-64
TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-64
CLEANING PRIORITY VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-64
STEERING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-65
TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-65
SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-65
BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-66
CIRCUIT AND BRAKE PUMP TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-66
BRAKING GROUP LEAK TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-67
ENGINE SPEED UNDER LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-68
PREPARING THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-68
TORQUE CONVERTER STALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-68
TORQUE CONVERTER AND HYDRAULIC STALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-69
POWER TRAIN GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-70
PREPARING THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-70
CONVERTER OIL PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-70
CLUTCH PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-71
ADDITIONAL PRESSURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-71
DIRECTIONAL CLUTCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-72
PREPARATION OF THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-72
TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-72
RETURN TO DIG DEVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-73
HYDRAULIC DRIFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-74

20-2 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING TABLE OF CONTENTS

LOADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-74
LIFT CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-74
BUCKET CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-75
BACKHOE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-76
BOOM CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-76
ARM CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-76
BUCKET CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-77
OUTRIGGER TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-78
AIR CONDITIONING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-79
TESTING THE WORKING TEMPERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-79
CHECKING THE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-79
EMPTYING THE AC UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-80
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-82
FRONT AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-82
REAR AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-87
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-92

WARNING! When working with others, use agreed upon signals and do not let unauthorized
persons near the machine.

WARNING! Before checking coolant level, wait until it has cooled. If the radiator cap is
removed when the coolant is hot, the coolant will spurt our and cause burns. Be
careful when working close to moving parts, fan, fan belt, etc. Entanglement with
moving parts can cause serious injury.

WARNING! Before testing, adjusting or troubleshooting, make sure the machine is parked on
firm, level ground. Check that all machine safety devices are applied and that
blocks are in place to prevent the machine from moving.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-3


TESTING AND ADJUSTING STANDARD VALUE TABLES FOR ENGINE
12
STANDARD VALUE TABLES FOR ENGINE
Machine Model WB140-2N WB140-2N
Engine S4D106-1FH - TIER I S4D106-2XFH - TIER II
Standard Permissible Standard Permissible
Check Item Test Conditions Unit
Value Value Value Value
High Idle 2375 50 2325 to 2425 2375 50 2325 to 2425
Engine Speed Low Idle RPM 1050 50 1000 to 1100 1050 50 1000 to 1100
Set Idle 2200 2200
Exhaust Gas Sudden Acceleration Bosch 0.9 1.5 4.0 4.0
Color @ High Idle Speed Index 0.5 1.0 3.5 3.5
Valve Clear- Intake Valve @ 20C 0.30 0.05 Max 0.35 0.25 0.1 Max 0.35
mm
ance Exhaust Valve @ 20C 0.30 0.05 Max 0.35 0.25 0.1 Max 0.35
Oil Temperature @ 69 to
kg/cm 34.9 1 27.5 1 34.9 1 27.5 1
Compression 72C
Pressure @ Engine Speed Using
RPM 250 250 250 250
Starter Motor
Coolant Temperature
Blow By
within Operating Range @ mm
Pressure
High Idle Speed
Oil @ Set Idle 4.48 3.97 to 4.99 4.48 3.97 to 4.99
kg/cm
Pressure @ Low Idle 1.02 Min 1.02 1.02 Min 1.02
Oil
Entire Speed Range C 120 Max 120 120 Max 120
Temperature
Fuel Injection
Before Top Dead Center Degrees 12.5 11.5 to 13.5 12.5 11.5 to 13.5
Timing
Fan Belt Deflection when pressed
mm 10 10 to 15 10 10 to 15
Tension with finger force of 10 kg

20-4 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING STANDARD VALUE TABLES FOR ENGINE
12
Machine Model WB150-2N WB150-2N
Engine S4D106-1FA - TIER I S4D106-2SFA - TIER II
Standard Permissible Standard Permissible
Check Item Test Conditions Unit
Value Value Value Value
High Idle 2375 50 2325 to 2425 2375 50 2325 to 2425
Engine Speed Low Idle RPM 1050 50 1000 to 1100 1050 50 1000 to 1100
Set Idle 2200 2050 100
Exhaust Gas Sudden Acceleration Bosch 0.9 1.5 4.0 4.0
Color @ High Idle Speed Index 0.5 1.0 3.5 3.5
Valve Clear- Intake Valve @ 20C 0.30 0.05 Max 0.35 0.25 0.1 Max 0.35
mm
ance Exhaust Valve @ 20C 0.30 0.05 Max 0.35 0.25 0.1 Max 0.35
Oil Temperature @ 69 to
kg/cm 34.9 1 27.5 1 34.9 1 27.5 1
Compression 72C
Pressure @ Engine Speed Using
RPM 250 250 250 250
Starter Motor
Coolant Temperature
Blow By
within Operating Range @ mm
Pressure
High Idle Speed
Oil @ Set Idle 4.48 3.97 to 4.99 4.48 3.97 to 4.99
kg/cm
Pressure @ Low Idle 1.02 Min 1.02 1.02 Min 1.02
Oil
Entire Speed Range C 120 Max 120 120 Max 120
Temperature
Fuel Injection
Before Top Dead Center Degrees 12.5 11.5 to 13.5 12.5 11.5 to 13.5
Timing
Fan Belt Deflection when pressed
mm 10 10 to 15 10 10 to 15
Tension with finger force of 10 kg

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-5


TESTING AND ADJUSTING STANDARD VALUE TABLES FOR CHASSIS
12
STANDARD VALUE TABLES FOR CHASSIS
Machine Model WB140-2N WB140-2N
Engine S4D106-1FH - TIER I S4D106-2XFH - TIER II
Standard Permissible
Standard Permissible
Component Test Conditions Unit Value Value
Value Value
BHC PPC BHC PPC
2350 2375 2300 to 2350 to
Max
Accelerator Hydraulic oil tempera- 50 50 2400 2425
pedal ture: 50C 1050 1050 1000 to 1000 to
Min
Engine
Speed

Converter oil tempera- 50 50 1100 1100


RPM
ture: 80C 1900 1900 1850 to 1850 to
Max
Accelerator Engine oil temp cooling 50 50 1950 1950
fuel circuit: in the limits 1050 1050 1000 to 1000 to
Min
50 50 1100 1100
All Controls a b c a b c a b c a b c
Control Valve

less loader
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
arm
mm
Loader Arm 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

BHC PPC BHC PPC


Raise 60 to 90 to
Loader Arm Neutral 85 60 to 110 75 100
Lower 90 100
Loader Dump 70 to 90 to
Neutral 115 90 to 140 85 100
Boom Curl 100 100
Backhoe Raise 90 to
Neutral 100 80 to 120 100 55 49 to 60
Boom Lower 110
Backhoe Extend 90 to
Neutral 100 80 to 120 100 55 49 to 60
Arm Retract 110
Engine
Backhoe Dump 90 to
Travel of Levers and Pedals

stopped Neutral 100 80 to 120 100 55 49 to 60


Bucket Curl 110
At the center
Backhoe of the knob Right 90 to
Neutral 100 80 to 120 100 55 49 to 60
Swing lever Left 110
Backhoe Valve reading Up mm 40 to
at the end of Neutral 50 35 to 65 50
Outriggers Down 60
working 10 to
stroke Out 15 10 to 20 15
Telescopic 20
Attachments Neutral
Arm 20 to
on the In 30 20 to 40 30
40
ground 10 to
Right 15 10 to 20 15
Hammer 20
Neutral
Pedal 20 to
Left 30 20 to 40 30
40
Fuel Con- 55 to
Min Max 70 50 to 90 70 70 55 to 85
trol Lever 85
Accelerator 55 to
Min Max 80 60 to 100 70 70 55 to 85
Pedal 85
Steering Right Left 2.2 to Max 2.2 to
Rev Max 2.5 2.2 to 2.5 Max 2.5
Wheel Left Right 2.5 2.5 2.5

20-6 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING STANDARD VALUE TABLES FOR CHASSIS

Machine Model WB150-2N WB150-2N


Engine S4D106-1FA - TIER I S4D106-2SFA - TIER II
Standard Permissible
Standard Permissible Value Value
Component Test Conditions Unit
Value Value
BHC PPC BHC PPC
2350 2375 2300 to 2350 to
Max
Accelerator Hydraulic oil tempera- 50 50 2400 2425
pedal ture: 50C 1050 1050 1000 to 1000 to
Min
Engine
Speed

Converter oil tempera- 50 50 1100 1100


RPM
ture: 80C 1900 1900 1850 to 1850 to
Max
Accelerator Engine oil temp cooling 50 50 1950 1950
fuel circuit: in the limits 1050 1050 1000 to 1000 to
Min
50 50 1100 1100
All Controls a b c a b c a b c a b c
Control Valve

less loader
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
arm
mm
Loader Arm 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

BHC PPC BHC PPC


Raise 90 to
Loader Arm Neutral 85 60 to 110 75 100 60 to 90
Lower 100
Loader Dump 70 to 90 to
Neutral 115 90 to 140 85 100
Boom Curl 100 100
Backhoe Raise 90 to
Neutral 100 80 to 120 100 55 49 to 60
Boom Lower 110
Backhoe Engine Extend 90 to
Neutral 100 80 to 120 100 55 49 to 60
Travel of Levers and Pedals

Arm stopped Retract 110


Backhoe At the center Dump 90 to
of the knob Neutral 100 80 to 120 100 55 49 to 60
Bucket Curl 110
lever
Backhoe Right mm 90 to
Valve reading Neutral 100 80 to 120 100 55 49 to 60
Swing Left 110
at the end of
Backhoe working Up
Neutral 50 35 to 65 50 40 to 60
Outriggers stroke Down
Telescopic Attachments Out 15 10 to 20 15 10 to 20
on the Neutral
Arm In 30 20 to 40 30 20 to 40
ground
Hammer Right 15 10 to 20 15 10 to 20
Neutral
Pedal Left 30 20 to 40 30 20 to 40
Fuel Con-
Min Max 70 50 to 90 70 70 55 to 85 55 to 85
trol Lever
Accelerator
Min Max 80 60 to 100 70 70 55 to 85 55 to 85
Pedal
Steering Right Left Max 2.2 to 2.2 to
Rev Max 2.5 2.2 to 2.5 Max 2.5
Wheel Left Right 2.5 2.5 2.5

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-7


TESTING AND ADJUSTING STANDARD VALUE TABLES FOR CHASSIS
12
Machine Model WB140-2N WB140-2N
Engine S4D106-1FH S4D106-2XFH
Standard Permissible Standard Permissible
Component Test Conditions Unit Value Value Value Value
BHC PPC BHC PPC
Loader Arm Tool connection at knob
2.5 2 to 3 2.5 2.5 1.5 to 3.5 1.5 to 3.5
Lever center and at 90 from
lever.
Value at the 10 mm be-
Loader fore end of working
Bucket stroke.
2.5 2 to 3 1.7 1.7 1.2 to 2.2 1.2 to 2.2
Lever
Distance between knob
and casing: 95 mm
Backhoe
1.5 1 to 2 1.6 2.0 1.0 to 2.2 1.8 to 2.2
Boom Lever
Force for lever or pedal operation

Backhoe
1.5 1 to 2 1.6 2.0 1.0 to 2.2 1.8 to 2.2
Arm Lever
Backhoe Engine speed:
Bucket min. 1.5 1 to 2 1.6 1.4 1.0 to 2.2 1.3 to 1.5
Lever Oil temperature:
kg
Backhoe 45 to 55C
1.5 1 to 2 1.6 1.4 1.0 to 2.2 1.3 to 1.5
Swing Lever Tool connection at
Outrigger knob center and
at 90 from the le- 3 2.5 to 3.5 3.8 2.3 to 5.3
Lever
ver.
Telescopic In 4 3 to 4 4 3.0 to 4.0
Tool connection
Arm Lever on edge, for ped- Out 8 6 to 10 8 6.0 to 10
Hammer als 8 6 to 10 8 6.0 to 10
Pedal Value at 10 mm
Fuel Control before end of
12 10 to 14 4 4 3 to 5 3 to 5
Lever work stroke.
Accelerator
3 2 to 4 4 4 2.5 to 5.5 2.5 to 5.5
Pedal
Brake
30 Max 60
Pedals

20-8 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING STANDARD VALUE TABLES FOR CHASSIS

Loader Con- 209.1


Engine speed: min 188.65 188.65 7.14 209.1 204 204 7.14
trol Valve 10.2
Oil temperature: 45 to
Backhoe 55C
Main

209.1
Control 211.08 211.08 7.14 209.1 204 204 7.14
Pump: economy mode. 10.2
Valve
Engine speed: 1500 50 178.5 178.5
Steering Unit 178.45 178.45 7.14 178.5 178.5
RPM 10.2 7.14
Loader 239.7 239.7
239.63 239.63 7.14 239.7 239.7
Bucket Curl 10.2 7.14
Loader
188.7 178.5
Bucket 178.45 178.45 7.14 188.7 188.7
10.2 7.14
Dump
Loader 3rd 239.7 239.7
239.63 239.63 7.14 239.7 239.7

kg/cm
Spool 10.2 7.14
Backhoe 306.0 311.1
Individual Circuits

362 362.00 7.14 306.0 311.1


Boom Raise Engine speed: min 10.2 7.14
Backhoe Oil temperature: 45 to 239.7 239.7
249.83 249.83 7.14 239.7 239.7
Boom Lower 55C 10.2 7.14
Backhoe Check one at a time 239.7 239.7
249.83 249.83 7.14 239.7 239.7
Arm Retract Pump: economy mode. 10.2 7.14
Backhoe 249.9 249.9
193.75 193.75 7.14 249.9 249.9
Swing 10.2 7.14
Backhoe 239.7 239.7
249.83 249.83 7.14 239.7 239.7
Bucket Curl 10.2 7.14
Hammer 173.4 173.4
173.35 173.35 7.14 173.4 173.4
Delivery 10.2 7.14
Steering Unit 244.8 244.8
244.73 244.73 7.14 244.8 244.8
Safety 10.2 7.14
Engine speed (w/o load):
2350 50
Hydraulic oil tempera-
2150 2225
Converter ture: 45 to 55C 2200 2275
2100 50 2050 to 2150 to to
Stall Converter oil tempera- 50 50
2250 2325
ture: 80C
Machine in 4th gear
Working brakes applied
Converter

Engine speed (w/o load):


RPM

2350 50
Hydraulic oil tempera-
ture: 45 to 55C
Converter/ Converter oil tempera- 2225 2200
2050 2250
Hydraulic ture: 80C 2000 50 1950 to 2050 to to
100 50
Stall Machine in 4th gear with 2325 2300
brakes applied
Front bucket curled stop
Steering at the end of
stroke

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-9


TESTING AND ADJUSTING STANDARD VALUE TABLES FOR CHASSIS
12
Machine Model WB150-2N WB150-2N
Engine S4D106-1FA S4D106-2SFA
Standard Permissible Standard Permissible
Component Test Conditions Unit Value Value Value Value
BHC PPC BHC PPC
Loader Arm Tool connection at knob
2.5 2 to 3 2.5 2.5 1.5 to 3.5 1.5 to 3.5
Lever center and at 90 from
lever.
Value at the 10 mm be-
Loader fore end of working
Bucket stroke.
2.5 2 to 3 1.7 1.7 1.2 to 2.2 1.2 to 2.2
Lever
Distance between knob
and casing: 95 mm
Backhoe
1.5 1 to 2 1.6 2 1.0 to 2.2 1.8 to 2.2
Boom Lever
Force for lever or pedal operation

Backhoe
1.5 1 to 2 1.6 2 1.0 to 2.2 1.8 to 2.2
Arm Lever
Backhoe Engine speed:
Bucket min. 1.5 1 to 2 1.6 1.4 1.0 to 2.2 1.3 to 1.5
Lever Oil temperature:
kg
Backhoe 45 to 55C
1.5 1 to 2 1.6 1.4 1.0 to 2.2 1.3 to 1.5
Swing Lever Tool connection at
Outrigger knob center and
at 90 from the le- 3 2.5 to 3.5 3.8 2.3 to 5.3
Lever
ver.
Telescopic In 4 3 to 4 4 3.0 to 4.0
Tool connection
Arm Lever on edge, for ped- Out 8 6 to 10 8 6.0 to 10
Hammer als 8 6 to 10 8 6.0 to 10
Pedal Value at 10 mm
Fuel Control before end of
12 10 to 14 4 4 3 to 5 3 to 5
Lever work stroke.
Accelerator
3 2 to 4 4 4 2.5 to 5.5 2.5 to 5.5
Pedal
Brake
30 Max 60
Pedals

20-10 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING STANDARD VALUE TABLES FOR CHASSIS

Loader Con- 209.1


Engine speed: min 188.65 188.65 7.14 209.1 204 204 7.14
trol Valve 10.2
Oil temperature: 45 to
Backhoe 55C
Main

209.1
Control 211.08 211.08 7.14 209.1 204 204 7.14
Pump: economy mode. 10.2
Valve
Engine speed: 1500 50 178.5
Steering Unit 178.45 178.45 7.14 178.5 178.5 178.5 7.14
RPM 10.2
Loader 239.7
239.63 239.63 7.14 239.7 239.7 239.7 7.14
Bucket Curl 10.2
Loader
188.7
Bucket 178.45 178.45 7.14 188.7 188.7 178.5 7.14
10.2
Dump
Loader 3rd 239.7
239.63 239.63 7.14 239.7 239.7 239.7 7.14

kg/cm
Spool 10.2
Backhoe 306.0
Individual Circuits

362 362.00 7.14 306.0 311.1 311.1 7.14


Boom Raise Engine speed: min 10.2
Backhoe Oil temperature: 45 to 239.7
249.83 249.83 7.14 239.7 239.7 239.7 7.14
Boom Lower 55C 10.2
Backhoe Check one at a time 239.7
249.83 249.83 7.14 239.7 239.7 239.7 7.14
Arm Retract Pump: economy mode. 10.2
Backhoe 249.9
193.75 193.75 7.14 249.9 249.9 249.9 7.14
Swing 10.2
Backhoe 239.7
249.83 249.83 7.14 239.7 239.7 239.7 7.14
Bucket Curl 10.2
Hammer 173.4
173.35 173.35 7.14 173.4 173.4 173.4 7.14
Delivery 10.2
Steering Unit 244.8
244.73 244.73 7.14 244.8 244.8 244.8 7.14
Safety 10.2
Engine speed (w/o load):
2350 50
Hydraulic oil tempera-
2150 2225
Converter ture: 45 to 55C 2200 2275
2275 50 2225 to 2325 to to
Stall Converter oil tempera- 50 50
2250 2325
ture: 80C
Machine in 4th gear
Working brakes applied
Converter

Engine speed (w/o load):


RPM

2350 50
Hydraulic oil tempera-
ture: 45 to 55C
Converter/ Converter oil tempera- 2225 2200
2050 2250
Hydraulic ture: 80C 2000 50 1950 to 2050 to to
100 50
Stall Machine in 4th gear with 2325 2300
brakes applied
Front bucket curled stop
Steering at the end of
stroke

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-11


TESTING AND ADJUSTING STANDARD VALUE TABLES FOR CHASSIS

The data in the table refers to a machine with a max 500 kg loader bucket and a 600 mm, max 160 kg backhoe
12
bucket with the standard arm or telescopic arm closed.
Machine Model WB140-2N WB140-2N
Engine S4D106-1FH S4D106-2XFH
Standard Permissible Standard Permissible
Component Test Conditions Unit Value Value Value Value
BHC PPC BHC PPC

Measuring position
Complete
Working 250 400 250 250 250 250
Equipment

In this position, check the feedback


of each cylinder and the leakage with
Loader

Boom
a load applied to the tip of the cutting mm 30 45 24 24 24 24
Cylinder
edge.
Ground level
Bucket: normal load (1500 kg)
Engine stopped
Oil temperature: 45 to 55C
Hydraulic Drift of Working Equipment

Make measurements as soon as the


Bucket engine is stopped.
15 25 10 10 10 10
Cylinder Measure the changes every 5 min.
and the total change after 15 min.

Complete
Measuring position Max Max Max Max
Working 300 450
325 325 300 300
Equipment

Boom Max Max Max Max


35 50
Cylinder 24 24 24 24
Backhoe

In this position, check the extension


of each cylinder and the leakage with mm
a normal load on the bucket.
Arm On level ground. Max Max Max Max
Bucket: normal load (450 kg) 15 25
Cylinder 13 13 13 13
Engine stopped
Oil temperature: 45 to 55C
Make measurements as soon as the
engine is stopped.
Bucket Measure the changes every 5 min. Max Max Max Max
and the total change after 15 min. 10 15
Cylinder 10 10 10 10

20-12 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING STANDARD VALUE TABLES FOR CHASSIS
12
Machine Model WB150-2N WB150-2N
Engine S4D106-1FA S4D106-2SFA
Standard Permissible Standard Permissible
Component Test Conditions Unit Value Value Value Value
BHC PPC BHC PPC

Measuring position
Complete
Working 250 400 250 250 250 250
Equipment

In this position, check the feedback


of each cylinder and the leakage with
Loader

Boom
a load applied to the tip of the cutting mm 30 45 24 24 24 24
Cylinder
edge.
Ground level
Bucket: normal load (1500 kg)
Engine stopped
Oil temperature: 45 to 55C
Hydraulic Drift of Working Equipment

Make measurements as soon as the


Bucket engine is stopped.
15 25 10 10 10 10
Cylinder Measure the changes every 5 min.
and the total change after 15 min.

Complete
Measuring position Max Max Max Max
Working 300 450
325 325 300 300
Equipment

Boom Max Max Max Max


35 50
Cylinder 24 24 24 24
Backhoe

In this position, check the extension


of each cylinder and the leakage with mm
a normal load on the bucket.
Arm On level ground. Max Max Max Max
Bucket: normal load (450 kg) 15 25
Cylinder 13 13 13 13
Engine stopped
Oil temperature: 45 to 55C
Make measurements as soon as the
engine is stopped.
Bucket Measure the changes every 5 min. Max Max Max Max
and the total change after 15 min. 10 15
Cylinder 10 10 10 10

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-13


TESTING AND ADJUSTING STANDARD VALUE TABLES FOR CHASSIS
12
The data in the table refers to a machine with a max 500 kg loader bucket and a 600 mm, max 160 kg backhoe bucket with
the standard arm or telescopic arm closed.
Machine Model WB140-2N WB140-2N
Engine S4D106-1FH - TIER I S4D106-2XFH - TIER II
Standard Permissible Standard Permissible
Component Test Conditions Unit Value Value Value Value
BHC PPC BHC PPC
Measuring position

Oil temperature: 45 to 55C


Backhoe balanced on the guides,
Swing Max Max
bucket in transport position. mm 15 25 Max 20 Max 30
Cylinders 20 30
Arm and bucket cylinder in. Put
the bucket link pin one meter from
the ground and swing at the end
Hydraulic Drift of Working Equipment

of boom stroke in one of two


directions.
Move the machine onto an incline
of 15 and apply the parking
brake.
Backhoe

Stop the machine. After one min.


check the cylinder feedback
opposite the boom every 5 min.
for a total of 15 min.
Measuring position

Max Max
Outriggers mm 20 30 Max 5 Max 5
5 5
Oil temperature: 45 to 55C
Backhoe balanced. Boom and
arm cylinders in, bucket cylinder
out.
Outriggers at max extension.
Engine stopped.
Check the frame lowering for
each side every 5 min. for a total
of 15 min.

20-14 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING STANDARD VALUE TABLES FOR CHASSIS
12
Machine Model WB150-2N WB150-2N
Engine S4D106-1FA - TIER I S4D106-2SFA - TIER II
Standard Permissible Standard Permissible
Component Test Conditions Unit Value Value Value Value
BHC PPC BHC PPC
Measuring position

Oil temperature: 45 to 55C


Backhoe balanced on the guides,
Swing Max Max
bucket in transport position. mm 15 25 Max 20 Max 30
Cylinders 20 30
Arm and bucket cylinder in. Put
the bucket link pin one meter from
the ground and swing at the end
Hydraulic Drift of Working Equipment

of boom stroke in one of two


directions.
Move the machine onto an incline
of 15 and apply the parking
brake.
Backhoe

Stop the machine. After one min.


check the cylinder feedback
opposite the boom every 5 min.
for a total of 15 min.
Measuring position

Max Max
Outriggers mm 20 30 Max 5 Max 5
5 5
Oil temperature: 45 to 55C
Backhoe balanced. Boom and
arm cylinders in, bucket cylinder
out.
Outriggers at max extension.
Engine stopped.
Check the frame lowering for
each side every 5 min. for a total
of 15 min.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-15


TESTING AND ADJUSTING STANDARD VALUE TABLES FOR CHASSIS
12
The data in the table refers to a machine with a max 500 kg loader bucket and a 600 mm, max 160 kg backhoe bucket with
the standard arm or telescopic arm closed.
Machine Model WB140-2N WB140-2N
S4D106-2XFH - TIER
Engine S4D106-1FH - TIER I
II
Standard Permissible
Standard Permissible
Component Test Conditions Unit Value Value
Value Value
BHC PPC BHC PPC
Max Max
Boom 2 Max 8 2 2
Loader

8 8
Max Max
Bucket 1.6 Max 6 1.6 1.6
6 6
Max Max
Boom Engine: Max. speed 3.3 Max 13.5 3.3 3.3
13.5 13.5
Cylinder Leakage

Oil temperature: 45 to 55C


Leak check: check the low pressure Max Max
Arm 3 Max 12 3 3

cm/mm
side of the cylinder. 12 12
Check one cylinder at a time. Max Max
Bucket 2.4 Max 9.5 2.4 2.4
Backhoe

For loader bucket and arm or backhoe 9.5 9.5


swing, check the two cylinders sepa-
rately. Max Max
Swing 3.2 Max 13 3.2 3.2
13 13
Max Max
Outrigger 3.3 Max 13.5 3.3 3.3
13.5 13.5
Telescopic Max Max
1.6 Max 6 1.6 1.6
Arm 6 6

Measuring position

2.9 3.1
Right 3.5 3.1 to 3.9 3.6 3.5 to to
Work Equipment Speed

4.3 3.9
Boom
swing
Backhoe

Right End
Travel Sec
to
Left End Engine speed 1700 to 1750 RPM
Travel Oil temperature: 45 to 55C
2.9 3.1
Arm horizontal
Left 3.5 3.1 to 3.9 3.6 3.5 to to
Power mode
4.3 3.9
The time referenced is for the
cylinder stroke without the
brake phase

20-16 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING STANDARD VALUE TABLES FOR CHASSIS
12
Machine Model WB150-2N WB150-2N
Engine S4D106-1FA - TIER I S4D106-2SFA - TIER II
Standard Permissible
Standard Permissible Value Value
Component Test Conditions Unit
Value Value
BHC PPC BHC PPC
Max Max
Boom 2 Max 8 2 2
Loader

8 8
Max Max
Bucket 1.6 Max 6 1.6 1.6
6 6
Max Max
Boom Engine: Max. speed 3.3 Max 13.5 3.3 3.3
13.5 13.5
Cylinder Leakage

Oil temperature: 45 to 55C


Leak check: check the low pressure Max Max
Arm 3 Max 12 3 3

cm/mm
side of the cylinder. 12 12
Check one cylinder at a time. Max Max
Bucket 2.4 Max 9.5 2.4 2.4
Backhoe

For loader bucket and arm or backhoe 9.5 9.5


swing, check the two cylinders sepa-
rately. Max Max
Swing 3.2 Max 13 3.2 3.2
13 13
Max Max
Outrigger 3.3 Max 13.5 3.3 3.3
13.5 13.5
Telescopic Max Max
1.6 Max 6 1.6 1.6
Arm 6 6

Measuring position

2.9 to 3.1 to
Right 3.5 3.1 to 3.9 3.6 3.5
4.3 3.9
Work Equipment Speed

Boom
swing
Backhoe

Right End
Travel Sec
to
Left End Engine speed 1700 to 1750 RPM
Travel Oil temperature: 45 to 55C
Arm horizontal 2.9 to 3.1 to
Left 3.5 3.1 to 3.9 3.6 3.5
Power mode 4.3 3.9
The time referenced is for the
cylinder stroke without the
brake phase

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-17


TESTING AND ADJUSTING STANDARD VALUE TABLES FOR CHASSIS
12
The data in the table refers to a machine with a max 500 kg loader bucket and a 600 mm, max 160 kg backhoe bucket with
the standard arm or telescopic arm closed.
Machine Model WB140-2N WB140-2N
Engine S4D106-1FH - TIER I S4D106-2XFH - TIER II
Standard Permissible Standard Permissible
Component Test Conditions Unit Value Value Value Value
BHC PPC BHC PPC
Measuring position 3.2
Low- 3.2 to
3.6 3.1 to 4.1 3.5 3.5 to
ered 3.8
Arm 3.8
Cylinders
Out
2.3
To level 2.3 to
Raised 2.5 2.1 to 2.9 2.6 2.6 to
ground 2.9
Engine speed: Max 2.9
Oil temperature: 45 to 55C
Loader

Speed up
Measuring position 2.1
1.6 to
Curl 2.5 2.1 to 2.9 2.5 1.9 to
2.2
Bucket 2.9
Cylinders
Out
2.8
Work Equipment Speed

2.6 to
Cylinders Dump 3.2 2.7 to 3.7 3.2 2.8 to
3.1
In Engine speed: Max 3.6
Oil temperature: 45 to 55C
Speed up Sec
Measuring position 2.3
Raise 2.3 to
2.3 1.9 to 2.7 2.6 2.6 to
2.9
2.9

Boom
Engine speed 1700 to 1750
Cylinder in
RPM

Backhoe

The engine speed, 1700 to 1750


Bucket
rpm, is to be checked using the 1.8
teeth on 1.6 to
procedure described in ENGINE Lower 1.6 1.2 to 2.0 2.2 1.9 to
level 2.2
SPEED in this section of the 2.6
ground
manual.
Oil temperature: 45 to 55C
Backhoe balanced
Power mode
The time referenced is for
the cylinder stroke without
the brake phase

20-18 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING STANDARD VALUE TABLES FOR CHASSIS
12
Machine Model WB150-2N WB150-2N
Engine S4D106-1FA - TIER I S4D106-2SFA - TIER II
Stan-
Permissible Standard Permissible
dard
Component Test Conditions Unit Value Value Value Value

BHC PPC BHC PPC


Measuring position Low- 3.2 to 3.2 to
3.6 3.1 to 4.1 3.5 3.5
ered 3.8 3.8
Arm
Cylinders
Out
2.3 to 2.3 to
To level Raised 2.5 2.1 to 2.9 2.6 2.6
2.9 2.9
ground Engine speed: Max
Oil temperature: 45 to 55C
Loader

Speed up
Measuring position 2.1 to 1.6 to
Curl 2.5 2.1 to 2.9 2.5 1.9
2.9 2.2
Bucket
Cylinders
Out
2.8 to 2.6 to
Work Equipment Speed

Cylinders Dump 3.2 2.7 to 3.7 3.2 2.8


3.6 3.1
In Engine speed: Max
Oil temperature: 45 to 55C
Speed up Sec
Measuring position Raise 2.3 to 2.3 to
2.3 1.9 to 2.7 2.6 2.6
2.9 2.9

Boom
Engine speed 1700 to 1750
Cylinder in
RPM

Backhoe

The engine speed, 1700 to 1750


Bucket
rpm, is to be checked using the 1.8 to 1.6 to
teeth on
procedure described in ENGINE Lower 1.6 1.2 to 2.0 2.2 1.9
2.6 2.2
level
SPEED in this section of the
ground
manual.
Oil temperature: 45 to 55C
Backhoe balanced
Power mode
The time referenced is for
the cylinder stroke without
the brake phase

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-19


TESTING AND ADJUSTING STANDARD VALUE TABLES FOR CHASSIS
12
The data in the table refers to a machine with a max 500 kg loader bucket and a 600 mm, max 160 kg backhoe bucket with
the standard arm or telescopic arm closed.
Machine Model WB140-2N WB140-2N
Engine S4D106-1FH - TIER I S4D106-2XFH - TIER II
Standard Permissible
Standard Permissible
Component Test Conditions Unit Value Value
Value Value
BHC PPC BHC PPC
Measuring position

3.0
3.2 to
Open 3.4 2.9 to 3.9 3.4 3.6 to
4.0
3.8

Arm Engine speed 1700 to 1750


Cylinder In RPM
The engine speed, 1700 to 1750
Cylinder rpm, is to be checked using the
Out procedure described in ENGINE
SPEED in this section of the
manual. 4.0
Close 4.1 to
Oil temperature: 45 to 55C 4.3 3.8 to 4.8 4.4 4.5 to
4.9
Work Equipment Speed

Backhoe balanced 4.8


Power mode
The time referenced is for
Backhoe

the cylinder stroke without Sec


the brake phase
Measuring position

1.8
2.4 to
Dump 2.1 1.7 to 2.5 2.2 2.6 to
2.8
2.6
Bucket
Cylinder In Engine speed 1700 to 1750
RPM
Cylinder The engine speed, 1700 to 1750
Out rpm, is to be checked using the
procedure described in ENGINE
2.6
SPEED in this section of the 2.6 to
Curl 2.9 2.5 to 3.3 3.0 3.1 to
manual. 3.4
3.4
Oil temperature: 45 to 55C
Backhoe balanced
Power mode

20-20 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING STANDARD VALUE TABLES FOR CHASSIS
12
Machine Model WB150-2N WB150-2N
Engine S4D106-1FA - TIER I S4D106-2SFA - TIER II
Stan- Standard Permissible
Permissible Value Value
Component Test Conditions Unit dard
Value
Value BHC PPC BHC PPC
Measuring position

3.0 to 3.2 to
Open 3.4 2.9 to 3.9 3.4 3.6
3.8 4.0

Arm Engine speed 1700 to 1750


Cylinder In RPM
The engine speed, 1700 to 1750
Cylinder rpm, is to be checked using the
Out procedure described in ENGINE
SPEED in this section of the
manual. Close 4.0 to 4.1 to
Oil temperature: 45 to 55C 4.3 3.8 to 4.8 4.4 4.5
4.8 4.9
Work Equipment Speed

Backhoe balanced
Power mode
The time referenced is for
Backhoe

the cylinder stroke without Sec


the brake phase
Measuring position

1.8 to 2.4 to
Dump 2.1 1.7 to 2.5 2.2 2.6
2.6 2.8

Bucket
Cylinder In Engine speed 1700 to 1750
RPM
Cylinder The engine speed, 1700 to 1750
Out rpm, is to be checked using the
procedure described in ENGINE
SPEED in this section of the 2.6 to 2.6 to
Curl 2.9 2.5 to 3.3 3.0 3.1
manual. 3.4 3.4
Oil temperature: 45 to 55C
Backhoe balanced
Power mode

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-21


TESTING AND ADJUSTING STANDARD VALUE TABLES FOR CHASSIS
12
Machine Model WB140-2N WB140-2N
Engine S4D106-1FH - TIER I S4D106-2XFH - TIER II
Standard Permissible Standard Permissible
Component Test Conditions Unit Value Value Value Value
BHC PPC BHC PPC
Measuring position
Loader

Lift Arm 0 Max 2 0 0 Max 2 Max 2

Engine speed: Min.


Oil temperature: 45 to 55C
Check the time needed to lift the
bucket from level ground.
Measuring position
Work Equipment Speed

Max Max
Boom 0 Max 2 Max 2 Max 2
Engine speed: Min. 2 2
Time Lag

Oil temperature: 45 to 55C


With attachments fully extended, Sec
lower the boom and check the
elapsed time from the beginning
of the machine lifting until the
bucket is on level ground.
Backhoe

Measuring position

Max Max
Arm 0 Max 2 Max 2 Max 2
Engine speed: Min. 2 2
Oil temperature: 45 to 55C
Put the boom at 45 and open the
arm completely with the bucket
curled. Extend the arm cylinder
and check the elapsed time
between arm stop at dead center
and restart movement.

20-22 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING STANDARD VALUE TABLES FOR CHASSIS
12
Machine Model WB150-2N WB150-2N
Engine S4D106-1FA - TIER I S4D106-2SFA - TIER II
Standard Permissible Standard Permissible
Component Test Conditions Unit Value Value Value Value
BHC PPC BHC PPC
Measuring position
Loader

Lift Arm 0 Max 2 0 0 Max 2 Max 2

Engine speed: Min.


Oil temperature: 45 to 55C
Check the time needed to lift the
bucket from level ground.
Measuring position
Work Equipment Speed

Max Max
Boom 0 Max 2 Max 2 Max 2
Engine speed: Min. 2 2
Time Lag

Oil temperature: 45 to 55C


With attachments fully extended, Sec
lower the boom and check the
elapsed time from the beginning
of the machine lifting until the
bucket is on level ground.
Backhoe

Measuring position

Max Max
Arm 0 Max 2 Max 2 Max 2
Engine speed: Min. 2 2
Oil temperature: 45 to 55C
Put the boom at 45 and open the
arm completely with the bucket
curled. Extend the arm cylinder
and check the elapsed time
between arm stop at dead center
and restart movement.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-23


TESTING AND ADJUSTING STANDARD VALUE TABLES FOR CHASSIS
12
Machine Model WB140-2N WB140-2N
Engine S4D106-1FH - TIER I S4D106-2XFH - TIER II
Standard Permissible
Standard Permissible Value Value
Component Test Conditions Unit
Value Value
BHC PPC BHC PPC
Measuring position

Bucket Engine speed: Min. 0 Max 2 Max 2 Max 2 Max 2 Max 2


Oil temperature: 45 to 55C
Put arm in horizontal position. Tilt
back the bucket cylinder and then
extend it.
Check the elapsed time between
bucket stop at dead center and
Work Equipment Speed

the restart movement.


Measuring position
Time Lag
Backhoe

Sec

Outriggers 0 Max 2 Max 2 Max 2 Max 2 Max 2


Engine speed: Min.
Oil temperature: 45 to 55C
Boom, arm, and bucket fully
retracted and placed in machine
centre position.
Check the time needed for outrig-
gers to raise the machine from
when they lean on level ground.
Check each outrigger separately.

20-24 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING SPECIAL TOOLS
12
Machine Model WB150-2N WB150-2N
Engine S4D106-1FA - TIER I S4D106-2SFA - TIER II
Standard Permissible
Standard Permissible Value Value
Component Test Conditions Unit
Value Value
BHC PPC BHC PPC
Measuring position

Bucket Engine speed: Min. 0 Max 2 Max 2 Max 2 Max 2 Max 2


Oil temperature: 45 to 55C
Put arm in horizontal position. Tilt
back the bucket cylinder and then
extend it.
Check the elapsed time between
bucket stop at dead center and
Work Equipment Speed

the restart movement.


Measuring position
Time Lag
Backhoe

Sec

Outriggers 0 Max 2 Max 2 Max 2 Max 2 Max 2


Engine speed: Min.
Oil temperature: 45 to 55C
Boom, arm, and bucket fully
retracted and placed in machine
centre position.
Check the time needed for outrig-
gers to raise the machine from
when they lean on level ground.
Check each outrigger separately.
SPECIAL TOOLS

Measurement Point Symbol Code Name Qty Note


Available
Valve clearance A Feeler gauge 1
Locally
1 Compression gauge 1 Kit Yanmar
Compression gauge B ATR800208
2 Adapter 1 TOL-97190080
Available
Engine speed C Multi scale tachometer 1 20 to 4000 rpm
Locally
Available
Oil and coolant temp D 1 Digital thermometer 1 -50 to 1200C
Locally

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-25


TESTING AND ADJUSTING SPECIAL TOOLS

Available
1 Pressure gauge 2 Full scale 61 kg/cm
Locally
Available
2 Pressure gauge 1 Full scale 255 kg/cm
Locally
Available
E 3 Pressure gauge 1 Full scale 408 kg/cm
Locally
Hydraulic pressure Available
4 Pressure gauge 1 Full scale 612 kg/cm
Locally
5
Servo control kit 1 0 to1020 kg/cm
6
ATR800200 Delivery 0 to 300 l/
1 Flow meter 1
F min.
2 Pipe fitting kit 1
Air bleeding G ATR201490 Tank cap 1 Pump air bleeding
Available
Hand brake L Spring dynamometer 1 Full scale 20 kg
Locally
Available
1 Maintenance station 1 For coolant R134a
Locally
Available Sampling every 15
Air Conditioning unit M 2 Thermometer hygrometer 1
Locally sec
Available
3 Leak detector 1 For coolant R134a
Locally

20-26 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING ENGINE SPEED
12
ENGINE SPEED

WARNING! When checking the engine speed be


careful. Do not touch high temperature
parts or get caught in rotating parts.

Check the engine speed under the following conditions:


Engine coolant temperature: 68 to 80 C.
Hydraulic oil temperature: 45 to 55 C.

TIER I ENGINE
1. Install and connect tachometer C.

2. Start the engine and check:


Low idle speed without load, accelerator pedal released in
minimum position. High idle speed without load, accelerator
pedal at the travel end.
Low idle speed: 1050 50 RPM
High idle speed: 2375 50 RPM
If the idle speeds are not within limits, without a load on the engine,
check the accelerator pedal stoppers and wiring insulation before
going on with other operations. See ACCELERATOR PEDAL
AND LEVER on page 20-42.
TIER II ENGINE
1. Remove the air filter a.

2. Start the engine and check:


Low idle speed without load, accelerator pedal released in
minimum position. High idle speed without load, accelerator
pedal at the travel end.
Low idle speed: 1050 50 RPM
High idle speed: 2375 50 RPM
If the idle speeds are not within limits, without a load on the engine,
check the accelerator pedal stoppers and wiring insulation before
going on with other operations. See ACCELERATOR PEDAL
AND LEVER on page 20-42.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-27


TESTING AND ADJUSTING VALVE CLEARANCE
12
VALVE CLEARANCE

TIER I ENGINE
Measurement conditions:
Engine: Cold
Adjust the clearance between the valves and rocker levers as fol-
lows:

Unit: mm
Engine Intake Exhaust
With cold S4D106-1FH 0.30 0.05
engine S4D106-1FA 0.30 0.05
Firing order: 1-3-4-2-1 at 180 steps
Normal rotation: Counterclockwise from flywheel
Cylinder No. 1: Opposite the fan side
ADJUSTING PROCEDURE

1. Remove the air cleaner A, muffler B, and valve cover C.

2. Rotate the crankshaft in its normal direction until the piston to be


checked is at full compression, Top Dead Center (TDC). In this
position the intake and exhaust valves are closed.

3. Loosen the lock nut d and unscrew the tappet e one turn. Check
that valve insert f is laying flat on the valve stem and that it is not
worn. If the valve inserts are damaged, replace them with new ones.
Make sure that the inserts fit and lay flat on the valve stem.

4. Place feeler gauge A between the insert and the rocker lever to be
adjusted. Rotate the tappet e until the rocker lever touches the
gauge. Secure the tappet with lock nut d.

Lock Nut: 14.7 to 19.6 Nm

After tightening the lock nut, check the clearance again.

5. Adjust the next cylinder valve using this same procedure. Repeat
the procedure for the other cylinders, according to their firing order.
VALVE COVER INSTALLATION

1. Check condition of valve cover c, gasket g, o-rings h and lock


nuts i; carefully clean the contact surface of the cylinder head.
Install the gasket, valve cover, fit o-rings and lock nuts.

Cover lock nut: 25 3 Nm

20-28 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING VALVE CLEARANCE
12
TIER II ENGINE

Measurement conditions:
Engine: Cold
Adjust the clearance between the valves and rocker levers as fol-
lows:

Unit: mm
Engine Intake Exhaust
With cold S4D106-2XFH 0.25 0.01
engine S4D106-2SFA 0.25 0.01
Firing order: 1-3-4-2-1 at 180 steps
Normal rotation: Counterclockwise from flywheel
Cylinder No. 1: Opposite the fan side
ADJUSTING PROCEDURE

1. Remove the air filter a and the muffler b.

2. Loosen the muffler support screws d and remove the air intake
duct e.

3. Disconnect the fuel feed pipes f. Remove clamp g and loosen


clamp h.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-29


TESTING AND ADJUSTING VALVE CLEARANCE
12
4. Loosen the fittings i connecting to the pump j on the fuel feed
pipes f.

5. Rotate the pipes f until they become disengaged from the valve
cover 1).

6. Remove the feed-through fittings 1! and their seals.

7. Loosen and remove the screws 1@ retaining the valve cover c.


Inspect the grommets.

8. Remove the valve cover c.


Inspect the seal. Replace the seal if damaged or cracked.

20-30 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING VALVE CLEARANCE
12
9. Rotate the crankshaft in the normal direction until the piston of the
cylinder you want to check reaches the compression position at Top
Dead Center (TDC).
In this position, the intake and exhaust valves are closed.

10. Loosen the lock nut 1# and unscrew the tappet by about one half
turn 1$.

11. Introduce the A feeler gauge between the valve link 1% and the
rocker arm 1^; tighten the tappet 1$ until rubbing against the A
feeler gauge. Lock the tappet using the lock nut 1#.

Lock Nut: 22 to 28 Nm

12. Loosen the nut 1& and, while applying pressure to the valve link 1%,
tighten the tappet 1* until it bottoms on the valve 1( and zeroes the
clearances. Lock the tappet using the nut.

Lock Nut: 22 to 28 Nm

If the nut 1& is very tight, use pliers to hold the valve link in
position 1%.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-31


TESTING AND ADJUSTING VALVE CLEARANCE
12
13. Reinstall all previously removed parts.

Valve cover screws 16.7 to 22.5 Nm

Injectors pump fittings 19.6 to 24.5 Nm

Clamp screws 7.8 to 9.8 Nm

20-32 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING COMPRESSION PRESSURE
12
COMPRESSION PRESSURE

WARNING! When measuring the compression pres-


sure be careful not to get caught in the
cooling fan, alternator belt or in any other
rotating parts. For this measurement the
engine should be at operating tempera-
ture. Take every precaution against burns.

Measurement conditions:
Engine: Operating temperature
Hydraulic oil: 55 to 60C.
Battery: Full charge
Valve clearance: Adjusted

TIER I ENGINE
1. Disconnect the high pressure pipe a.

2. Remove the nozzle holder b of the cylinder to be checked.

3. Disconnect the connector c of the fuel cut off the solenoid valve
d.

4. Crank the engine with the starting motor.

5. Install B2 adapter and connect B1 pressure gauge. Check that the


seal is installed in the adapter and that it is not damaged.

6. Crank the engine with the starting motor and measure the compres-
sion pressure.
Measure the compression pressure at the point where the pres-
sure gauge indicator remains steady.
While measuring the compression pressure, monitor the engine
speed with a tachometer; if speed is not within the specified
range, refer to the diagram.
Compression value: 35 1 kg/cm @ 250 RPM
Minimum permissible: 27.5 1 kg/cm @ 250 RPM
Difference between cylinders: 2 to 3 kg/cm

7. After measuring, reinstall the nozzle holder b, reconnect the high


pressure pipe, feedback pipe and connector c.

Nozzle holder collar bolts: 10 to 12 Nm

High pressure union: 20 to 25 Nm

NOTE: Check compression in all cylinders.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-33


TESTING AND ADJUSTING COMPRESSION PRESSURE
12
TIER II ENGINE

1. Access the valves using the same procedure as in VALVE


CLEARANCE on page 20-28.

2. Loosen and remove the fittings a retaining the fuel recovery piping
b and the seals.

3. Loosen the fitting c and rotate the piping b outward.

4. Loosen and remove the screw d retaining the bracket e retaining


the injector f.

5. Turn the bracket e over and pull out the injector f.


Use care not to allow dirt inside the injector and/or its seat.

6. Disconnect the engine shutdown connector g and ensure that the


accelerator is fully released, no fuel flow.

20-34 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING COMPRESSION PRESSURE
12
7. Using the starter motor, crank the engine complete a few revs.

8. Apply the adaptor B2 and gauge B1 and follow the instructions


provided with the equipment.
Check for a seal inside the adaptor and verify that the seal is
not damaged.

9. Crank the engine with the starting motor and measure the compres-
sion pressure.
Measure the compression pressure at the point where the pres-
sure gauge indicator remains steady.
When measuring the compression pressure, check also engine
speed with a tachometer; if the speed is not within the specified
range, refer to diagram.
Compression value: 35 1 kg/cm @ 250 RPM
Minimum permissible: 28 1 kg/cm @ 250 RPM
Difference between cylinders: 2 to 3 kg/cm

10. After completing the procedure, reinstall the injector f, reconnect the
fuel return pipe and complete the assembly procedure.

Nozzle holder collar bolts: 8 to 10 Nm

High pressure union: 20 to 25 Nm

NOTE: Check compression in all cylinders.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-35


TESTING AND ADJUSTING FUEL INJECTION TIMING
12
FUEL INJECTION TIMING

TIER I ENGINE
Check the fuel injection timing of the No. 1 cylinder by means of
the No. 1 delivery valve of the injection pump.
The cylinders are numbered 1 2 3 4 starting from the flywheel side.

1. Rotate the crankshaft using the engine pulley a and put the No. 1
cylinder piston at top dead center (TDC).

Top dead center (TDC) is shown by the notch d on the pulley a


positioned on zero of the scale e and by the closing of both cylin-
der No. 1 valves.
If the notch d of the pulley a is in the zero position on the scale e
but the cylinder No. 1 valves are not closed, rotate the crankshaft
one full turn.
After recognition of TDC, rotate the crankshaft counterclockwise,
as viewed from the pulley side, 20.

2. Disconnect the cylinder No. 1 high pressure tube C from the injec-
tion pump.

3. Rotate the crankshaft slowly in the clockwise direction (as viewed


from the pulley side), checking the fuel level in the No. 1 delivery
holder of the injection pump.

4. Stop the pulley B rotation as soon as the fuel level starts to


increase.

20-36 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING FUEL INJECTION TIMING
12
5. Check the notch d position on the crankshaft pulley a compared
with the scale e; the indicated value should correspond to the angle
of the fuel injection timing.
Standard fuel injection timing:
S4D106-1FA ............................................. 12.5 1
S4D106-1FH:............................................ 12.5 1
NOTE: Repeat this procedure several times.

6. If the injection timing does not meet the standard value, rotate the
injection pump f away from or toward the cylinder block after
loosening the pump nuts g (quantity 4) and lock nuts h which
attach the bracket i to the injection pump.
To RETARD the injection timing, rotate the pump f away
from the cylinder block.
To ADVANCE the injection timing, rotate the pump f toward
the cylinder block.

7. Tighten the pump lock nuts g at the cylinder block and lock nuts h
at bracket i.

Nuts: 34 to 44 Nm

Bracket lock nut: 44 to 54 Nm

8. Reconnect the cylinder No. 1 high pressure pipe b to the injection


pump.

Delivery pipe union: 20 to 25 Nm

TIER II ENGINE

WARNING! Remove the ignition key.

Check the fuel injection timing of No. 1 cylinder by means of the


No.1 delivery valve of the injection pump.
The cylinders are numbered 1 2 3 4 starting from the flywheel side.

1.Rotate the crankshaft using the engine pulley and put the No. 1 cyl-
inder piston at top dead center (TDC).
Top dead center (TDC) is shown by the notch d on the pulley a posi-
tioned on zero of the scale e and by the closing of all cylinder No.
1 valves.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-37


TESTING AND ADJUSTING FUEL INJECTION TIMING
12
If the notch d of the pulley a is in the zero position on the scale e but
cylinder No. 1 valves are not closed, rotate the crankshaft one turn.
After recognition of TDC, rotate the crankshaft in the counterclock-
wise direction, from the pulley side view, 20.

2. Disconnect the cylinder No.1 high pressure pipe b from the injec-
tion pump.

3. Rotate the crankshaft slowly in the clockwise direction from the


pulley side, checking the fuel level into the No. 1 delivery valve of
the injection pump.

4. Stop the pulley a rotation as soon as the fuel level starts to


increase.

5. Check the notch d position on the crankshaft pulley a compared


with the scale e; the reading value corresponds to angle of the fuel
injection timing.
Standard fuel injection timing.................................. 12.5 1

NOTE:Repeat checking more than once.

6. If the injection timing is not on the standard value, rotate the injec-
tion pump f inwards or outwards of the engine block after loosen-
ing the pump nuts g.
To RETARD the injection timing, rotate the pump f outward
from the engine block.
To ADVANCE the injection timing, rotate the pump f inward
to the engine block.

20-38 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING FUEL INJECTION TIMING
12
7. Tight the pump nuts g at the cylinder block.

Nuts: 34 to 44 Nm

8. Reconnect the cylinder No. 1 high pressure pipe b to the injection


pump.

Delivery pipe union: 20 to 25 Nm

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-39


TESTING AND ADJUSTING FAN BELT
12
FAN BELT

TENSION CHECK
1. Push the fan belt B at the midway point between the alternator C
and the water pump pulley A. Check the deflection with a pressure
of 10 kg.
New belt tension: 7 to 9 mm
In use belt tension: 10 to 15 mm

TENSION ADJUSTMENT
1. Loosen the alternator mounting bolt d and the mounting bolt e of
the adjustment plate.

2. Rotate the alternator c to tension the fan belt b and tighten the
mounting bolts d and e.

3. Check the fan belt b tension.


If the belt has been replaced, check the tension again after the first
20 hours of operation.

Bolt d: 44 to 54 Nm

Bolt e: 23 to 29 Nm

20-40 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING COMPRESSOR DRIVE BELT
12
COMPRESSOR DRIVE BELT

CHECKING TENSION
1. Push fan belt b at midway point between compressor c and pulley
d. Check the deflection with a pressure of 10 kg.
New belt tension: 4 to 6 mm
In use belt tension: 7 to 10 mm

TENSION ADJUSTMENT
1. Loosen the mounting bolt e of the eccentric d.

2. Use a lever on the eccentric d to correctly tension the belt and


secure the adjustment with bolt e.

3. Recheck the belt b tension.


If the belt has been replaced, recheck the tension again after 20
hours of operation.

Bolt: 123 Nm

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-41


TESTING AND ADJUSTING ACCELERATOR PEDAL AND LEVER
12
ACCELERATOR PEDAL AND LEVER
Measurement conditions:
Machine: Shut down with safety features engaged
Engine: Stopped and at operating temperature
Idle speeds: Within standard value.
In order to check high speed engine idle, push the accelerator pedal
a manually.

ACCELERATOR PEDAL TRAVEL


1. Make sure that the accelerator pedal a is fully raised and the accel-
erator lever b is at its minimum stroke.

2. Check that the accelerator lever c is in contact with low idle speed
adjusting screw d.

3. Adjust the nut e and locknut f of the accelerator pedal cable, and
the hand accelerator at a distance of 0.2 to 0.3 mm from the lever
g.

20-42 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING ACCELERATOR PEDAL AND LEVER
12
4. Push the accelerator pedal until the accelerator lever c contacts the
high idle adjusting screw h.

5. Adjust the end travel stopper i of the accelerator pedal a in this


position and secure it with the nut j.

6. Release the accelerator pedal a.

ACCELERATOR LEVER TRAVEL


1. Remove the mat and lateral cover a.

2. Loosen the nut b and tighten the end lever travel bolt c a few
turns.

3. Start the engine.

4. With the lever d, set the hand accelerator idle speeds.


High idle TIER I Engine: 2000 50 RPM
High idle TIER II Engine: 1900 50 RPM
Low idle: 1050 50 RPM

5. Loosen the end lever travel bolt c so that it is in contact with the
lever d and then secure the nut.

6. Bring the engine to low idle and check the accelerator lever idle
speed adjustment by pushing the lever to the end of its stroke.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-43


TESTING AND ADJUSTING BRAKE PEDAL TRAVEL
12
BRAKE PEDAL TRAVEL
Measurement conditions:
EngineStopped
MachineAttachments on ground

1. Check that the pedal A is at the stopper B and the pedals height
matches side view A measurement. If necessary, correct the height
by adjusting the stopper.
A measurement: 313 3 mm

2. Check that pin C can freely run and lock the pedals A.
TIER I ENGINE
MASTER CYLINDER ROD ADJUSTMENT

1. Loosen the nut d which locks the adjusting rod e. Loosen the
adjusting rod until it touches the brake pump piston seat.

2. Tighten the adjusting rod e one turn and lock it with nut d.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the other pedal.


After tightening the nuts d, check that the adjusting rod e touches
the brake pump piston seat.
MICROSWITCHES ADJUSTMENT

1. Loosen the microswitch locking nuts f.

2. Adjust the microswitches g and make sure there is a minimum


clearance, 1 mm with the pedals in the neutral position, between the
microswitches body and the pedal.
CHECKING ADJUSTMENT

1. Verify the below measurements as shown in the figure.


A measurement......................With pedal in neutral position
B measurement.................With cylinder rod touching pump
C measurement.................With pedal touching microswitch

20-44 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING BRAKE PEDAL TRAVEL
12
TIER II ENGINE

MASTER CYLINDER ROD

1. Loosen the nut d locking the adjusting rod e and loosen until it
touches the brake pump piston seat.

2. Tighten the adjusting rod e one turn and lock it with the nut d.

3. Repeat operations 1 and 2 for the other pedal.


After tightened the nuts d, check that the adjusting rod e
touch the brake pump piston seat simultaneously.
CHECKING ADJUSTMENT

1. Verify measurements shown in figure.


A measurement ..............................Pedal in neutral position
B measurement............ Master cylinder rod touching the pump

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-45


TESTING AND ADJUSTING BLEEDING AIR
12
BLEEDING AIR

HYDRAULIC PUMP
Bleeding of air from the pump is necessary: make sure the pump is
full of oil

1. When installing the pump.

2. When replacing connecting hoses between the pump and hydraulic


tank.

3. When replacing the hydraulic oil and hydraulic tank overhaul.


Bleeding air is accomplished as follows:

4. Fill the hydraulic tank with oil and install plug G. Remove plug b
on top side of pump c. Connect plug G to low pressure com-
pressed air connection.

5. Slowly and intermittently introduce compressed air into the


hydraulic tank until oil flows out without air bubbles.
Maximum pressure in tank: 0.51 kg/cm

6. Install plug b and lock it. While slowly depressurizing the hydrau-
lic tank, check the oil level. Add oil as necessary to maintain the
proper level.

7. Start the engine and run it for few minutes before bleeding air from the whole system.
CYLINDERS
When the hydraulic cylinders or pipe fittings have been replaced, it is necessary to bleed air before using the machine
again.
Operate one movement at a time starting from the lift cylinders.

1. Start the engine and run it at high idle speed for about 5 min. to warm up the oil and pressurize the hydraulic system.

2. Return the engine to low idle speed, extend and retract the piston 4 to 5 times.
Extend and retract pistons to within 100 mm of end of stroke.

3. Bring the engine to high idle speed and repeat Step 2. above. Return the engine to low idle speed and make a complete
travel of the piston until the hydraulic pump reaches its maximum pressure.

4. Repeat above operation, starting with Step 2. for all cylinders.

20-46 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING BLEEDING AIR
12REPEAT ABOVE OPERATION
FOR ALL CYLIN.HE
HYDRAULIC TANK (STARTING
AIR BLEEDING
OIL FROM POINT 2)
IS OBTAINED

1. Put the machine in oil level check position and remove the tank
plug. If necessary add oil to reach the correct level.

2. After stopping the engine wait for a few minutes until the air bub-
bles disappear on oil surface.

3. Install the tank plug.


HYDRAULIC OIL TANK PRESSURIZATION
1. With engine at low idle speed, slowly extend all cylinders to their
end of stroke.

2. Stop the engine and remove tank plug.

3. Check the condition of gasket and reassemble plug.


Avoid increasing the engine speed until after completing all air
bleeding procedures and after the pressurization of oil tank.
After air bleeding procedures, operate the engine at low idle speed
for about 10 minutes before starting to work.

WORK CIRCUITS
1. Put all work attachments on level ground, stop the engine.

2. Move all control levers in all directions to completely release


remain pressure in the cylinders and the main circuit.

3. Slowly loosen the oil filler from the tank to remove any residual
pressure.
BRAKE CIRCUIT
You must bleed air from the braking circuit every time maintenance
is performed on the braking circuit, a component is replaced, or
when air has entered the circuit. Machine must be stopped with all
attachments on level ground.

1. Make sure that oil in the brake system tank a is at maximum level.
Remove the pedal lock pin.

2. Remove the safety plugs and connect a plastic hose to the bleed
screws b to catch the oil.

3. Push the brake pedals to the bottom. Keeping them pushed, loosen
the bleed screw b of the left brake until the pedals reach the end of
their stroke.

4. Keeping the pedal at the end of its stroke, tighten the bleed screw
b.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-47


TESTING AND ADJUSTING BLEEDING AIR
12
5. Release the brake pedals, wait for few seconds and repeat above
operations two or three times until oil without air bubbles flows out
from the bleed screw.

6. Repeat same operations for the right brake unit.

7. Disconnect the pedal lock pin.

8. Push one brake pedal to bottom and, keeping it pushed, loosen the
bleed screw b of one of the two braking units until the pedal
reaches the end of its stroke.
Check that oil without air bubbles flows out from the bleed
screw b.

9. Repeat same operations for the other brake unit.


Frequently check the oil level in the tank and refill it when the
level approaches minimum.
After bleeding the air, reinstall the safety plugs on the screws
b.
CHECK BRAKE CIRCUIT
1. Start the engine and lower the backhoe outrigger and force them
downwards in order to raise the rear wheels.

2. Engage forward gear in order to move the wheels.

3. Return the machine to neutral and lower it. Stop the engine.

4. Apply 50 kg on the pedal and verify measure D.

5. Insert the pedal lock pin and applying the same mass, verify the
measurement D.
D measurement, one pedal: Not < 165 mm
D measurement with both pedals: Not < 170 mm

20-48 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
12
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

INTRODUCTION

A Engine D Loader Control Valve G Backhoe Relief Valve


B Transmission E Backhoe Control Valve H Steering Valve
C Hydraulic Pump F Loader Relief Valve I Filtered Return To Tank

The machine is equipped with two control valves having the following functions:
Loader Control Valve, 2 or 3 spools: For front work attachments control.
Backhoe Control Valve, 6, 7 or 8-spools: For rear work attachments control.
The two control valves are each protected against overpressure by a main relief valve with adjustable setting.
Control valves are fed by hydraulic pump P1 which is controlled by a priority valve when the steering unit is used.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-49


TESTING AND ADJUSTING HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
12
LOADER CONTROL VALVES

2 SPOOL LOADER CONTROL VALVE


Cylinder Control Port
Arm Lift A1
a
Lower B1
Bucket Curl A2
b
Dump B2

3 SPOOL LOADER CONTROL VALVE


Cylinder Control Port
Arm Lift A1
a
Lower B1
Bucket Curl A2
b
Dump B2
MP Bucket Or Retract A3
C Attachment
Extend B3

20-50 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
12
BACKHOE CONTROLS STYLE VALVE

6 SPOOL BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE


Bottom Port Top Port
a Arm Close A1 Open B1
b Swing Left A2 Right B2
C Left Outrigger Up A3 Down B3
d Right Outrigger Up A4 Down B4
e Bucket Dump A5 Curl B5
f Boom Lift A6 Lower B6

7 SPOOL BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE


Bottom Port Top Port
a Arm Close A1 Open B1
b Swing Left A2 Right B2
C Left Outrigger Up A3 Down B3
d Right Outrigger Up A4 Down B4
e Bucket Dump A5 Curl B5
f Boom Lift A6 Lower B6
g Telescope Arm In A7 Out B7

7 SPOOL BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE


Bottom Port Top Port
a Arm Close A1 Open B1
b Swing Left A2 Right B2
C Left Outrigger Up A3 Down B3
d Right Outrigger Up A4 Down B4
e Bucket Dump A5 Curl B5
f Boom Lift A6 Lower B6
h Hammer Run A8 Blank B8

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-51


TESTING AND ADJUSTING HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

8 SPOOL BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE


Bottom Port Top Port
a Arm Close A1 Open B1
b Swing Left A2 Right B2
C Left Outrigger Up A3 Down B3
d Right Outrigger Up A4 Down B4
e Bucket Dump A5 Curl B5
f Boom Lift A6 Lower B6
g Telescope Arm In A7 Out B7
h Hammer Run A8 Blank B7

20-52 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
12
EXCAVATOR CONTROLS STYLE VALVE

6 SPOOL BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE


Bottom Port Top Port
a Arm Close A1 Open B1
b Swing Left A2 Right B2
C Left Outrigger Up A3 Down B3
d Right Outrigger Up A4 Down B4
e Bucket Dump A5 Curl B5
f Boom Lift A6 Lower B6

7 SPOOL BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE


Bottom Port Top Port
a Arm Close A1 Open B1
b Swing Left A2 Right B2
C Left Outrigger Up A3 Down B3
d Right Outrigger Up A4 Down B4
e Bucket Dump A5 Curl B5
f Boom Lift A6 Lower B6
g Telescope Arm In A7 Out B7

7 SPOOL BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE


Bottom Port Top Port
a Arm Close A1 Open B1
b Swing Left A2 Right B2
C Left Outrigger Up A3 Down B3
d Right Outrigger Up A4 Down B4
e Bucket Dump A5 Curl B5
f Boom Lift A6 Lower B6
h Hammer Run A8 Blank B8

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-53


TESTING AND ADJUSTING HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

8 SPOOL BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE


Bottom Port Top Port
a Arm Close A1 Open B1
b Swing Left A2 Right B2
C Left Outrigger Up A3 Down B3
d Right Outrigger Up A4 Down B4
e Bucket Dump A5 Curl B5
f Boom Lift A6 Lower B6
g Telescope Arm In A7 Out B7
h Hammer Run A8 Blank B7

20-54 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING MAIN RELIEF VALVES
12
MAIN RELIEF VALVES
The pressure readings are to be taken from check points on both
control valves. Measurement conditions:
EngineStopped at operating temperature
Hydraulic oil55 to 60C
Parking brakeApplied

TESTING
LOADER CONTROL VALVE (2 OR 3 SPOOL)

1. Connect the pressure gauge E3 to the pressure adapter B of the


front shovel control valve A.

2. Start the engine and bring up to max speed and check the nominal
pressure of the main relief valve E by rolling the front bucket to the
end of its stroke.
Nominal pressure:
WB140-2N: .................................................... 189 7 kg/cm
WB150-2N: .................................................... 204 7 kg/cm

BACKHOE CONTROL VALVE (6, 7 OR 8 SPOOLS)

1. Connect the pressure gauge E3 to the pressure adapter D of the


backhoe control valve c.

2. Start the engine and bring up to max speed and check the nominal
pressure of the main relief valve F while forcing the bucket into
maximum curl position.
Nominal pressure:
WB140-2N: .................................................... 211 7 kg/cm
WB150-2N: .................................................... 224 7 kg/cm

If the main relief valve pressures do not correspond to the nominal


values, they must be reset.

SETTING RELIEF PRESSURE

WARNING! For adjustments, prepare the machine as


for pressure testing.

1. Remove safety plug.

2. Loosen lock nut g.

3. Force the specific control lever to the end of its stroke.


Loader: Force the bucket into the maximum curl position.
Backhoe: Force the bucket into the maximum curl position.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-55


TESTING AND ADJUSTING MAIN RELIEF VALVES
12
4. Adjust the pressure with the adjusting screw h.
To INCREASE the pressure, rotate the adjusting screw in the
CLOCKWISE direction.
To DECREASE the pressure, rotate the adjusting screw in the
COUNTERCLOCKWISE direction.

5. Tighten the locknut g to secure the adjustment.

6. Reinstall safety plug.

20-56 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING LOADER CIRCUIT RELIEF VALVES
12
LOADER CIRCUIT RELIEF VALVES
Measurement conditions:
Engine: Stopped at operating temperature
Hydraulic oil: 55 to 60C
Parking brake: Applied

TESTING PRESSURE
1. Connect the pressure gauge E3 to the pressure adapter B of the
loader control valve.

2. Start the engine and bring the hand accelerator lever up to 1050
rpm.

3. Set the main relief valve c to a value 30 kg/cm higher than the
maximum pressure to be tested.

4. Check the circuit relief valve d, e, f and g single movement


pressure. Refer to the following tables for the cylinder and its
movement.
d Raise the loader arm so that the bucket will clear the ground.
Fully curl the bucket and read and record the pressure on the
gauge.

e Raise the loader arm so that the bucket will clear the ground.
Fully dump the bucket and read and record the pressure on the
gauge.

f Raise the loader arm so that the bucket will clear the ground.
Fully extend the cylinder and read and record the pressure on
the gauge.

g Raise the loader arm so that the bucket will clear the ground.
Fully retract the cylinder and read and record the pressure on
the gauge.

Unit: kg/cm
Port Description Pressure
d A2 Bucket Dump 235
e B2 Bucket Curl 166
f A3 Cylinder Retract 235
g B3 Cylinder Extend 235

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-57


TESTING AND ADJUSTING LOADER CIRCUIT RELIEF VALVES
12
SETTING PRESSURE
The pressure must be set while the control lever, for the cylinder
being tested, is forced to the end of its stroke.

1. Remove the safety plug h.

2. Loosen the locknut i.

3. Adjust the pressure with the adjusting screw j.


To INCREASE the pressure, rotate CLOCKWISE.
To DECREASE the pressure, rotate COUNTERCLOCK-
WISE.

4. Tighten locknut i to secure the adjustment.

Locknut: 10 1 Nm

WARNING! After the pressure is adjusted, install the


safety plug h to avoid unauthorized tam-
pering.

5. Reset the main relief valve pressure to the standard value after all
of the secondary valves have been checked and set.

20-58 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING BACKHOE CIRCUIT RELIEF VALVES
12
BACKHOE CIRCUIT RELIEF VALVES
Measurement conditions:
Engine: Stopped at operating temperature
Hydraulic oil: 55 to 60C
Parking brake: Applied

TESTING PRESSURE
1. Connect the pressure gauge E3 to the pressure adapter B of the
backhoe control valve a.

2. Start the engine and bring the hand accelerator lever up to 1050
rpm.

3. Set the main relief valve c to a value 40 kg/cm higher than the
maximum pressure to be tested.

4. Check the circuit relief valve d, e, f, g, h and i single move-


ment pressure. Refer to the following tables for the cylinder and its
movement.
d Spread the backhoe along the ground. Curl the bucket and fully
retract the arm cylinder. Read and record the pressure on the
gauge.

e Place the backhoe in the transport position and lock the boom.
Swing the backhoe to the full right. Read and record the pres-
sure on the gauge.

f With the backhoe in the transport position and the boom lock
in place, swing the backhoe to the full left. Read and record the
pressure on the gauge.

g With the backhoe centered raise the boom and extend the arm
the bucket will clear when curled. Fully curl the bucket and
read and record the pressure on the gauge.

h Place the backhoe in the transport position and lock the boom.
Lower the boom and read and record the pressure on the
gauge.

i The backhoe boom raise circuit valve pressure can only be


checked and set during a bench test.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-59


TESTING AND ADJUSTING BACKHOE CIRCUIT RELIEF VALVES
12
Unit: kg/cm
Port Description Pressure
d A1 Arm Retract 245
e B2 Swing Right 184
F A2 Swing Left 184
G B5 Bucket Curl 245
H B6 Boom Lower 245
I A6 Boom Raise 357
J A8 Not Used 163
The backhoe boom raise circuit valve pressure can only be checked
and set during a bench test.
SETTING PRESSURE
The pressure must be set while the control lever, for the cylinder
being tested, is forced to the end of its stroke.

1. Remove the safety plug 1).

2. Loosen the locknut 1!.

3. Adjust the pressure with the adjusting screw 1@.


To INCREASE the pressure, rotate CLOCKWISE.
To DECREASE the pressure, rotate COUNTERCLOCK-
WISE.

4. Tighten locknut 1! to secure the adjustment.

Locknut: 10 1 Nm

WARNING! After the pressure is adjusted, install the


safety plug 1) to avoid unauthorized tam-
pering.

5. Reset the main relief valve pressure to the standard value after all
of the secondary valves have been checked and set.

20-60 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING UNLOADING VALVE
12
UNLOADING VALVE
Measurement conditions:
Engine: Stopped and at working temperature.
Hydraulic oil: 45 to 55C.
Machine: front equipment on the ground, parking brake
applied and boom and arm fully extended.
Working mode: Power

TESTING
1. Disconnect the hose b from the load sensing line. Install a tee and
reconnect the hose.

2. Remove the plug c and install pressure adapter.

3. Connect pressure gauge E5 to the adapter.

4. Start the engine and set it at 1050 50 rpm. Without any machine
movement, all the control levers in the neutral position, read the P
pressure.
P - Unloading Valve ......................................... 24.5 kg/cm
If the P value is not within the limits, adjust the unloading
valve a.

ADJUSTMENT
1. Remove plug e, spring f, washers g, and valve body h.

2. Place a shim d under the spring f and install the valve.


One shim, 1 mm thick, increases the P by 3 kg/cm.

Plug: 100 Nm

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-61


TESTING AND ADJUSTING LOAD SENSING (LS) VALVE
12
LOAD SENSING (LS) VALVE
Measurement conditions:
Engine: Stopped and at working temperature.
Hydraulic oil: 45 to 55C.
Machine: front equipment on the ground, parking brake
applied and boom and arm fully extended.
Working mode: Power

TESTING
1. Disconnect the hose b from the load sensing line. Install a tee and
reconnect the hose.

2. Remove the plug c and install a pressure adapter.

3. Connect the pressure gauge E5 to the adapter.

4. Start the engine and set at 1050 50 RPM. Without any machine
movement, and all levers in the neutral position, read the P pres-
sure on the gauge.
P - Unloading Valve ......................................... 24.5 kg/cm
If the P value is not within this limit, adjust the unloading
valve.

5. Raise the boom up to the end of its stroke and read the P pressure
on the gauge.
P - Load Sensing Valve ................................... 21.5 kg/cm
If the P value is not within limits, adjust the load sensing
valve a.
ADJUSTMENT
1. Remove the cover nut e. Loosen the locknut f.

2. Adjust the pressure using the adjustment screw g.


To INCREASE the pressure, rotate CLOCKWISE.
To DECREASE the pressure, rotate COUNTERCLOCK-
WISE.

3. Tighten the locknut f to secure the adjustment.

Locknut: 21 Nm

4. Check the gasket d and install the nut e.

Cover Nut: 21 Nm

20-62 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING FLOW VALVE
12
FLOW VALVE
Measurement conditions:
Engine: Stopped at working temperature
Hydraulic oil: 45 to 55C
Machine: Safe, parking brake applied
Control valve lever: Neutral position

1. Disconnect the hose a from the load sensing line. Install the tee b
and reconnect the hose.

2. Connect a pressure port and gauge E1 to the tee b.

3. Connect a second gauge E1 to the rear control valve pressure port


c.

4. Start the engine and at low idle without any machine movement,
check the pressure on both gauges.
P pressure at control valve gauge: 30 3 kg/cm
Normal pressure PLS: 6 2 kg/cm
This value is due to the influence of the counterpressure
present in the steering circuit.

If any variations are found, they do not represent a problem


provided that the difference of 21 1 kg/cm between the two
readings is respected.

5. If the difference between the readings is higher than 24 1 kg/cm,


stop the engine and release the residual pressures.

6. Thoroughly clean the valve d and reinstall it.

Valve: 20 Nm

7. If, after cleaning the valve d, the value still does not fall within the
tolerance limits of 24 1 kg/cm, install a new valve.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-63


TESTING AND ADJUSTING PRIORITY VALVE
12
PRIORITY VALVE
Measurement conditions:
Engine: Stopped at working temperature
Hydraulic oil: 55 to 60C
Parking brake: Applied

TESTING
1. Connect a pressure gauge E2 to the pressure adapter a of the back-
hoe control valve.

2. Start the engine and set it at 1500 50 rpm. Check the gauge E2
pressure value with a stopped steering wheel.
Pressure Value24 kg/cm

3. Slightly turn the steering wheel and check that pressure increases.
Continue turning the steering wheel to the end of a full turn and
check that while forcing the steering wheel, pressure increases to
the normal value.
Backhoe Controls: 178 10 kg/cm
Excavator Controls: 178 7 kg/cm
If the pressure does not reach the normal value, reset the pres-
sure of the steering unit
If the pressure indicated by the gauge does not change while
turning the steering wheel, and it takes excessive force to turn
the wheel, the priority valve b needs to be cleaned.
CLEANING PRIORITY VALVE
1. Remove the priority valve plug d, spring e and rod f.
Carefully check and make notes on the disassembly so that you
can reassemble the priority valve.

2. Remove the plug g and ball h of the inside valve and the spring i.
Check that the hole j and nozzle c are completely clean. Replace
the spring i, ball h and plug g

Plug: Loctite 542

Plug: 20 Nm

Do not allow any Loctite to enter the hole j. Remove all


excess Loctite from the rod f.

3. Lubricate the rod f and install it in its seat. Make sure that it slides
freely. Insert the spring e and plug d.

Plug: 100 Nm

4. Start the engine and execute several steering manoeuvres. If the


fault is not corrected, replace the complete steering column with a
new one.

20-64 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING STEERING SYSTEM
12
STEERING SYSTEM
Measurement condition:
Engine: Operating temperature
Hydraulic oil: 55 to 60C

TESTING
1. Connect a pressure gauge E2 to the pressure adapter a of the back-
hoe control valve.

2. Start the engine and set at 1500 50 rpm. Turn the steering wheel
from end to end.

3. Force the steering wheel to the end of its rotation and check the
pressure.
Backhoe Controlled Pressure: 178 10 kg/cm
Excavator Controlled Pressure: 178 7 kg/cm

4. Check the pressure at the other end of the steering direction as well.
SETTING
If the pressure is not within the permissible limits, reset the pres-
sure on the upper valve b of the steering unit.

1. Remove the plug c. Insert a wrench and loosen the screw d.

2. Adjust the pressure with the screw e.


To INCREASE the pressure, rotate CLOCKWISE.
To DECREASE the pressure, rotate COUNTERCLOCK-
WISE.

3. Stop the engine. Secure the adjustment screw e by tightening


screw d.

4. Install the plug E making sure that the gasket f is properly seated.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-65


TESTING AND ADJUSTING BRAKE SYSTEM
12
BRAKE SYSTEM
Measurement condition:
Engine: Stopped
Machine: on solid and level ground, with the equipment raised
and safety devices engaged.
Brake pedals: independent, with the fluid container level at
maximum.
Brake system testing is accomplished in two parts:

1. Testing the circuit and brake pump tightness.

2. Leak tightness test of the braking group.

WARNING! If both the tests give positive results,


check for leaks in the piping of the braking
system.

CIRCUIT AND BRAKE PUMP TEST


1. Disconnect the equalizer connecting pipe a from the brake pumps
b of the circuit being tested.

2. Securely plug the equalizer orifice A when the pipe is discon-


nected.

3. Remove clamp d and disconnect delivery lines e from the pumps.

4. Connect a pressure gauge E2 to the pump b.

5. Push the brake pedal corresponding to the pump and bring the cir-
cuit up to a pressure.
Brake Pressure: 122 kg/cm.
Do not exceed the maximum permissible value of 153 5 kg/
cm.

6. Keep the pedal pushed for at least 2 minutes and check that the
pedal pressure and position remain steady.
If the position of the pedal changes to maintain the pressure,
the pressure loss is due to leaks inside the pump. This can be
confirmed by checking the oil. If there are leaks, it will show
signs of mixing.

7. Repeat the test for the other brake pump.

20-66 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING BRAKE SYSTEM
12
BRAKING GROUP LEAK TEST
1. Disconnect the delivery tube e of the braking group being tested.

2. Connect the tee between delivery line f and the braking group.
Make sure to insert pressure adapter between the braking
group and the cut off valve g.

3. Connect pressure gauge E2 to the pressure adapter of the tee and


open the valve g.

4. Operate the brake pump to feed pressure into the circuit to a pres-
sure of about 122 kg/cm.
Do not exceed the maximum permissible value of 158 5 kg/
cm.

5. Close valve g to maintain pressure in the braking group being


tested.

6. Release the brake pedal and observe the pressure indicated on


gauge E2 for 2 minutes.
If the pressure value shows a negative change, it means that the
braking piston seals are defective.

WARNING! For further confirmation of the leak can be


obtained by an increase in the oil level in
the axle, which leads to a mixing of the
oils. Change all the sealing rings between
the axle sections, and carry out a com-
plete lubrication oil change.

7. Repeat the test for the other braking group, follow the same
method.

8. Reassemble the braking circuit

WARNING! After testing and any repairs, bleed air


from the brake units, see BLEEDING AIR.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-67


TESTING AND ADJUSTING ENGINE SPEED UNDER LOAD
12
ENGINE SPEED UNDER LOAD
Measurement conditions:
Engine: Stopped at working temperature
Hydraulic oil: 45 to 55 C
Power train oil: Working temperature
Brake pedals: Connected
Machine: on solid and level ground with the equipment raised
and safety devices engaged.
Two tests must be performed:

1. Stall test with the torque converter under load.

2. Stall test with the torque converter and the hydraulic system under
load.
The tests must be performed after a no load test of the engine
speed. For details, see ENGINE SPEED.

WARNING! During the following tests, while acceler-


ating the engine with the gear engaged,
the condition of the brake disks can also
be checked. If, while force is being
exerted on the brake pedals, the machine
moves, even slowly;
A. Release the accelerator immediately and stop the
engine.
B. Check the wear on the brake disks and change them
before completing the tests.

PREPARING THE MACHINE


1. Prepare the tachometer C to measure the engine rpm.
When mounting an electronic transducer tachometer on a die-
sel delivery line to the injection nozzles, make sure that it is
placed far away from the clamp.

WARNING! Make sure that the brake pedals are fas-


tened together with the cotter pin b.

TORQUE CONVERTER STALL


1. Start the engine at set at the lowest idle. Engage 4th gear and apply
the brake firmly.

2. While keeping the brake applied, accelerate the engine gradually up


to high idle and measure the speed reached.
WB140-2N TIER I Engine: 2100 50 rpm
WB140-2N TIER II Engine BH Controls: 2200 50 rpm
WB140-2N TIER II Engine EX Controls: 2275 50 rpm
WB150-2N TIER I Engine: 2275 50 rpm
WB150-2N TIER II Engine BH Controls: 2200 50 rpm
WB150-2N TIER II Engine EX Controls2275 50 rpm

3. Release the accelerator pedal and move on to the next test.

20-68 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING ENGINE SPEED UNDER LOAD
12
TORQUE CONVERTER AND HYDRAULIC STALL
1. Start the motor at set at the lowest idle. Engage 4th gear and apply the brake firmly.

2. While keeping the brake applied, 4th gear engaged, accelerate the engine gradually and at the same time activate the con-
trol valve lever to curl the front bucket, and turn the steering wheel and hold it at the end of its stroke.

3. Once the maximum engine speed and maximum pressure of the bucket circuit have been reached, note the speed reached
by the engine.
TIER I Engine: 2000 50 rpm
TIER II Engine BH Controls: 2050 50 rpm
TIER II Engine EX Controls: 2250 50 rpm
If the engine rpm are higher than the permissible limit in both tests, check the delivery pressure to the converter and
the clutch pressures.
If the engine rpm is lower than the permissible limit, check the condition of the air filter, the engine compression, the
timing, the injection pump, and the valve clearances.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-69


TESTING AND ADJUSTING POWER TRAIN GROUP
12
POWER TRAIN GROUP
The power train group can be used to perform pressure tests on the
internal hydraulic circuit. These are useful for identifying malfunctions.
Specifically, the tests involve:

1. Converter oil pressure.

2. Clutch engagement pressures for both directions of travel.


Test conditions:
Engine: Stopped
Brake pedals: Connected
Machine: On solid and level ground with the equipment raised
and safety devices engaged.
PREPARING THE MACHINE
1. Prepare the tachometer C to measure the engine rpm.
When mounting an electronic transducer tachometer on a die-
sel delivery line to the injection nozzles, make sure that it is
placed far away from the line clamp.

WARNING! Make sure that the brake pedals are fas-


tened together with the cotter pin b.

CONVERTER OIL PRESSURE


1. Remove the plug P22 and connect pressure gauge E6.

2. Start and engine and heat all the fluids up to working temperature.
Make sure that the power train oil reaches a temperature of 80
5C.

3. With the engine at low idle, check the pressure on the pressure
gauge E6.
Normal pressure: Min. 0.5 kg/cm

4. Gradually increase the engine speed to high idle. Take a new read-
ing from the pressure gauge E6.
Normal pressure: 9.2 kg/cm

5. Bring the engine back to low idle and compare the pressure with
the normal value.
Normal pressure: Min. 0.5 kg/cm
If the maximum pressure value drops to below the permissible
lower limit, the power train pump needs an overhaul.

20-70 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING POWER TRAIN GROUP
12
CLUTCH PRESSURE
1. Remove the access plate from the cab floor.

2. Remove plug P19 and connect pressure gauge E6.

3. Start and heat the engine and all the fluids up to working tempera-
ture. Make sure that the power train oil reaches a temperature of 80
5C.

4. With the engine at low idle, check the pressure on the gauge E6.
Normal pressure: Max. 0.32 kg/cm

5. Select the REVERSE gear and gradually increase the engine speed
to high idle. Take a new reading from the pressure gauge E6.
Normal pressure: 11 to 13 kg/cm

6. Bring the engine back to low idle and place the transmission in neu-
tral. Compare the pressure with the normal value.
Normal pressure: Max. 0.36 kg/cm

7. Remove the pressure adapter and replace the plug P19.

Plug 23 Nm

8. Repeat the same test for the FORWARD gear, reading the pressure
from the plug P18.
If the pressures are different for the travel directions, there is a
loss of pressure on the clutch piston with lowest pressure.

ADDITIONAL PRESSURES
P17 Oil Cooler Back Pressure
FWD/REV clutch in neutral: 0.5 to 5 kg/cm
FWD/REV clutch ENGAGED: 0.5 to 3.5 kg/cm
P21 4WD Engagement Pressure
@ 900 RPM: 13 to 14 kg/cm
@ 2200 RPM: 13 to 15.5 kg/cm

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-71


TESTING AND ADJUSTING DIRECTIONAL CLUTCHES

DIRECTIONAL CLUTCHES
Test conditions:
Engine: Stopped.
Brake pedals: Connected
Machine: on solid and level ground with the equipment raised
and safety devices engaged.
This test must be performed after having checked the pressures of
the power train group.
PREPARATION OF THE MACHINE
1. Prepare tachometer C to measure the engine rpm.
When mounting an electronic transducer tachometer on a die-
sel delivery line to the injection nozzles, make sure that it is
placed far away from the line clamp.

WARNING! During the following tests, while acceler-


ating the engine with the gear engaged,
the condition of the brake disks can also
be checked. If, while force is being
exerted on the brake pedals, the machine
moves, even slowly;
A. Release the accelerator immediately and stop the
engine.
B. Check the wear on the brake disks and change them
before completing the tests.

WARNING! Make sure that the brake pedals are fas-


tened together by the cotter pin a.

TESTING
1. Start and heat the engine and all the fluids up to working tempera-
ture. Make sure that the power train oil reaches a temperature of 80
5C.

2. With the engine at low idle, accelerate to high idle. Check that the
rpm remain within permissible limits.

3. Brake hard and bring the engine up to high idle.

4. Maintaining the braking action and the acceleration, engage the


FORWARD gear and check that the engine speed decreases until it
is once again within permissible limits.

5. Repeat this test in REVERSE gear.


If the rpm are higher than the permissible limits, the clutches are
worn, and must be replaced.

20-72 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING RETURN TO DIG DEVICE
12
RETURN TO DIG DEVICE
Adjustment conditions:
Machine: On solid and level ground
Engine: Stopped
Hydraulic oil: 45 to 55C
Parking brake: Engaged

1. Rest the bucket on the ground, making sure that the bottom is paral-
lel to the surface.

2. Stop the engine and remove the sensor guard a.

3. Check that there is a distance of 3 to 4 mm between the sensor C


and rod D. If necessary, loosen the nuts E and adjust the distance
until the indicated measurement is obtained. Tighten the nuts to
secure the adjustment.

4. Loosen screw F and move bracket G towards the rear until the sen-
sor is completely free of rod D.

5. Start the engine and set at low idle. Adjust the position of the
bracket G until the sensor C is engaged.
When the rod contacts the sensor, the warning lamp b will be
activated.

6. Secure the bracket G position by tightening the screw.

7. Perform several tests by raising and dumping the bucket. If the


bucket is able to rest flat on the ground, reinstall the sensor guard
a.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-73


TESTING AND ADJUSTING HYDRAULIC DRIFT
12
HYDRAULIC DRIFT
If working attachments drift, check if the drift is due to the cylinder
seals or the control valve.
Test conditions:
Engine: Operating temperature
Hydraulic oil: 45 to 55C
Remove and install pipes only after any residual pressure has
been removed.

LOADER
LIFT CYLINDER

1. Position the bucket vertically with the cutting edge or teeth resting
on 10 cm blocks a.

2. Stop the engine and remove any residual hydraulic pressure.

3. Disconnect the hoses B and C from the lift cylinders D and plug
them.

4. Plug the lift cylinder base side. Apply a temporary hose to the rod
side to catch any oil leakage.

5. Start the engine and retract the bucket until the cutting edge or teeth
tilt 15 above horizontal.

6. Stop the engine and check the bucket link position for 5 minutes.
If the bucket link has no lowering movement, drift is due to the
control valve.
To check each cylinder, proceed as follows:

7. Position the bucket vertically with the teeth resting on 10 cm thick


blocks.

8. Remove the plug (installed earlier in Step 4) from the base side of
one cylinder.

9. Start the engine and retract the bucket until the teeth tilt 15 above
horizontal.

10. Stop the engine and check the bucket position for 5 minutes.
If the bucket link has a lowering movement, drift is due to gas-
ket seals of the plugged cylinder.

11. Repeat Steps 7 through 10 to check the other cylinder.

20-74 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING HYDRAULIC DRIFT
12
BUCKET CYLINDER

1. Position the bucket on level ground and tilt the cutting edge or teeth
up 15 a. Put a 1500 kg weight into the bucket. Stop the engine and
remove any residual hydraulic pressure.

2. Disconnect the hoses B and C from the dump cylinders D and plug
them.

3. Plug the dump cylinder base side. Apply a temporary hose to the
rod side to catch any oil leakage.

4. Start the engine and raise the bucket up to horizontal alignment of


the bucket hinge and arm hinge.

5. Stop the engine and check the bucket cutting edge or teeth position
for 5 minutes.
If the bucket has no swing movement, drift is due to the control
valve.
To test the individual cylinders, proceed as follows:

6. Lower the bucket to the ground.

7. Remove the plug from one of the cylinders installed on the base
side in Step 3.

8. Start the engine and raise the bucket as indicated in Step 4.

9. Stop the engine and check the position of the bucket cutting edge or
teeth for 5 minutes.
If the bucket cutting edge or teeth turn, the drift is due to the
gasket seals of the plugged cylinder.

10. Repeat Steps 6 through 10 to test the other cylinder.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-75


TESTING AND ADJUSTING HYDRAULIC DRIFT
12
BACKHOE
Test condition:
Backhoe: Aligned
Outriggers: Raised
BOOM CYLINDER

1. Position the machine with its arm in vertical position with the bot-
tom of the bucket resting on level ground.

2. Stop the engine and remove any residual hydraulic pressure.

3. Disconnect hoses B and C from cylinder D and plug them.

4. Plug the cylinder head side.

5. Apply a temporary hose to the base side to catch any oil leakage.

6. Start the engine and extend the arm completely.

7. Stop the engine and check the boom position for 5 minutes.
If the boom has a lowering movement, drift is due to cylinder
gaskets.
If the boom has no lowering movement, drift is due to the con-
trol valve.

ARM CYLINDER

1. Position the machine with its arm a fully extended with the bucket
opened and teeth on the ground.

20-76 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING HYDRAULIC DRIFT
12
2. Stop the engine and remove any residual hydraulic pressure.

3. Disconnect the hoses B and C from the arm cylinder D and plug
them.
If a safety valve is installed, remove it for this test.

4. Plug the arm cylinder port on the rod side. Attach a temporary hose
to the base side to catch any oil leakage.

5. Start the engine and raise the boom.

6. Stop the engine and check the arm position for 5 minutes.
If the arm has a lowering movement, the drift is due to the cyl-
inder gaskets.
If the arm has no movement, the drift is due to the control
valve.

BUCKET CYLINDER

1. Position the machine with the bucket arm vertical and the bottom of
the bucket resting on level ground.

2. Put a 450 kg weight a into the bucket

3. Stop the engine and remove any remaining hydraulic pressure.

4. Disconnect hoses b and c from bucket cylinder d and plug them.

5. Plug the bucket cylinder hole on the base side and attach a tempo-
rary hose to the rod side to catch any oil leakage.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-77


TESTING AND ADJUSTING HYDRAULIC DRIFT
12R
6. Start the engine and raise the boom.

7. Stop the engine and check the bucket position for 5 minutes.
If the bucket has an opening movement, drift is due to cylinder
gaskets.
If the bucket has no movement, drift is due to the control valve.

OUTRIGGER TESTING

1. Position the machine with its arm in vertical position with the bot-
tom of the bucket resting on level ground.

2. Place support stands a of a suitable height beneath the outriggers,


and bring the cylinder eyes to a horizontal position.

3. Without forcing them, lower the outriggers onto the support stands.

4. Stop the engine and release any residual hydraulic pressure.

5. Remove the hoses b and c from the cylinders d and plug them.

6. Plug the cylinder base side c. Apply a temporary hose to the rod
side to catch any oil leakage.

7. Start the engine. Use force on the boom to raise the machine and
remove the support stands supporting the outriggers.

8. Lower the machine and stop the engine.

9. Check the outriggers position for 5 minutes.


If one or both outriggers have a lowering movement, drift is
due to one or both cylinders.
If there is no lowering, drift is due to the control valve.

20-78 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
12
AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
Test conditions:
Machine on level ground with the work equipment raised and
safety devices engaged
Parking brake: Engaged

TESTING THE WORKING TEMPERATURE


1. Connect the maintenance station to the high pressure valve and the
low pressure valve.

2. Start the engine and bring it up to a speed of 1500 rpm.

3. Switch on the AC unit using the switch in the cab.

4. Select an intermediate ventilation speed inside the cab.

5. Use the thermometer M2 to check that the temperature inside the cab is equal to or lower than the ambient temperature.
If the temperature of the cab is higher than the ambient temperature, open the doors and widows and wait until the cab
temperature stabilizes at the outside value.

6. Close the doors and windows and let the AC unit operating these conditions for 5 to 10 minutes.

7. Use the thermometer M2 to check the temperature of the air at the central outlets.
Position the probe as close as possible to the air outlets.

8. Compare the average value of the measured temperatures using the following table:
Ambient Air Temp C 20 25 30 35
Outgoing Air Temp C 6 to 8 8 to 10 8 to 12 9 to 14

9. If the average value of the temperature measured does not fall within the values given in the table, it will be necessary to
thoroughly check the unit.
CHECKING THE UNIT
Check the unit after the Steps 1 through 4.and 6. of the preceding paragraph. A diagnosis of faults in the unit is based upon the
working pressures.
When the pressures do not fall within the values given in the following table, the causes must be found by checking the high-
pressure and low pressure gauges.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-79


TESTING AND ADJUSTING AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
12
Unit: kg/cm
Outside Air Temperature C Unit with R134a.
Low Pressure High Pressure
Min Max Min Max
20 1.2 2.5 6.0 9.0
25 1.0 2.5 7.5 10.5
30 1.1 2.4 9.5 13.0
35 1.3 2.4 12.0 15.5
40 1.5 1.8 18.0 18.8
45 1.8 1.9 21.5 22.0
The following conditions can be found:
CONDITIONS CAUSES - FAULTS
LP high to HP normal or low Electromagnetic pulley that slips or does not engage correctly
Expansion valve blocked in open position
Compressor damaged
LP low to HP high or normal Expansion valve blocked in closed position or obstructed
Filter saturated with moisture
Obstruction in the LP line or in the HP line between the filter and the evaporator.
LP normal to HP normal Infiltration of hot air into the evaporator group, the pipes or the cab
Hot air circulating in the heating group
Formation of ice on the evaporator
LP high to HP high Normal condition with very high ambient temperature, higher than 43C
Excess coolant, 30 to 35% more
Overheating of condenser
Air present in the unit
Obstruction in the HP line between the compressor and the condenser filler tube
behind the measurement point of the HP
LP normal or low to HP low Normal condition with very low temperature, lower than 5C
Lack of coolant, 70 to 75% less, probable leakages
Obstruction in the HP line between the compressor and the condenser filler tube
before the measurement point of the HP
Compressor damaged
LP roughly equal to HP Compressor belt missing
Electromagnetic pulley that slips or does not engage
Compressor damaged
EMPTYING THE AC UNIT
1. Connect the maintenance station M1 to service valves a and b
and follow the specific maintenance station instructions relative to
the drainage of the unit.

2. Disconnect the group to be substituted or reconditioned immedi-


ately after switching off the maintenance station. Plug the removed
or disconnected connection tubes tightly and with a minimum of
delay.

20-80 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
3. Carefully check the quantity of R134A recovered and contained in the disassembled parts, since the same quantity must
be replaced when the air conditioning unit is filled.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-81


TESTING AND ADJUSTING TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
12
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

FRONT AXLE

Wheel vibration; front tire resistance; half shaft breakage.


CAUSES REMEDY
Incorrect installation Correct installation
Defective axle Replace the differential in case it does not survive any of the test
phases
Overloading incorrect weight distribution Remove excessive weight and redistribute load following instructions
related to the vehicle
Different rotation radius of the tires Replace the tire or adjust pressure to have the same radius on both tires
Bent half shaft Replace half shaft
No differential action; jamming while steering.
CAUSES REMEDY
Incorrect installation Correct installation
Defective axle Replace the differential in case it does not survive any of the test
phases
Broken half shaft Replace half shaft
Bent half shaft Replace half shaft
Steering is difficult; vehicle goes straight while trying to turn it.
CAUSES REMEDY
Incorrect installation Correct installation
Defective axle Replace the differential in case it does not survive any of the test
phases
Overloading/incorrect weight distribution Remove excessive weight and redistribute load following instructions
related to the vehicle
Different rotation radius of the tires Replace the tire or adjust pressure to have the same radius on both tires
Broken half shaft Replace half shaft
Excess noise
CAUSES REMEDY
Incorrect installation Correct installation
Defective axle Replace the differential in case it does not survive any of the test
phases
Overloading/incorrect weight distribution Remove excessive weight and redistribute load following instructions
related to the vehicle
Different rotation radius of the tires Replace the tire or adjust pressure to have the same radius on both tires
Bent or broken half shaft Replace half shaft
Incorrect wheel adjustment Verify group integrity and wheel side bearings
Contamination in the axle box or incorrect assembly Look for foreign particles. Check for proper assembly of the various
of parts parts of the axle.

20-82 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
12
Uneven wear of tires
CAUSES REMEDY
Incorrect installation Correct installation
Defective axle Replace the differential in case it does not survive any of the test
phases
Overloading/incorrect weight distribution Remove excessive weight and redistribute load following instructions
related to the vehicle
Different rotation radius of the tires Replace the tire or adjust pressure to have the same radius on both tires
Bent or broken half shaft Replace half shaft
Blocked half shaft:
Abnormal functioning of the differential or Verify assembly of all components
breakage/blockage of control device
Vehicles with wide steering angle may proceed Reduce the steering angle to minimum and decelerate when the
with kicks, have steering difficulty or cause vehicle begins to kick.
pneumatic wear on sharp turns.
Incorrect wheel adjustment Verify group integrity and wheel side bearings
Friction noise
CAUSES REMEDY
Incorrect installation Correct installation
Defective axle Replace the differential in case it does not survive any of the test
phases
Bent or broken half shaft Replace half shaft
Damaged or worn out axle parts Check the condition of the ring gear, pinion gear, bearings, etc.
Replace when necessary.
Contamination in the axle box or incorrect assembly Look for foreign particles. Check for proper assembly of the various
of parts parts of the axle.
Incorrect adjustment of bevel gear set. Replace or adjust as required.
Parts of the trans worn out transmission gears, U
joint, etc.
Vibration during forward drive, intermittent noise
CAUSES REMEDY
Incorrect installation Correct installation
Defective axle Replace the differential in case it does not survive any of the test
phases
Overloading/incorrect weight distribution Remove excessive weight and redistribute load following instructions
related to the vehicle
Bent half shaft Replace half shaft
Different rotation radius of the tires Replace the tire or adjust pressure to have the same radius on both tires

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-83


TESTING AND ADJUSTING TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
12
Noise while driving
CAUSES REMEDY
Excessive backlash between pinion and ring gear Adjust
Worn out pinion and ring gear Replace
Worn out pinion bearings Replace
Pinion bearings loose Adjust
Excessive axial pinion backlash Adjust
Worn out differential bearings Replace
Differential bearings loose Adjust
Ring gear out of round Replace
Low oil level Oil level
Poor or worn oil Replace
Bent half shaft Replace
Noise while driving in neutral
CAUSES REMEDY
Noises coming from axle are usually heard but not Replace or adjust (see above)
loud when vehicle moves in neutral gear.
Incorrect backlash between pinion and ring, sound Replace
heard while decelerating, disappears while increas-
ing speed
Pinion or input flange worn out Adjust
Intermittent noise
CAUSES REMEDY
Ring gear damaged Replace bevel gear set
Differential box bolts loosened Tighten to torque
Constant noise
CAUSES REMEDY
Ring gear teeth or pinion damaged Replace bevel gear set
Worn out bearings Replace
Pinion spline worn out Replace
Bent half shaft Replace
Noise while steering
CAUSES REMEDY
Worn out differential gears Replace
Worn out differential box or spider Replace
Differential thrust washers worn out Replace
Half shaft spline worn out Replace

20-84 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
12
Ring gear teeth broken at the outer side
CAUSES REMEDY
Excessive gear load compared to the one foreseen Replace bevel gear set. Carefully follow the recommended operations
Incorrect gear adjustment (excessive backlash) for the adjustment of the bevel gear set free backlash.

Pinion nut loosened


Ring gear tooth broken
CAUSES REMEDY
Load bump Replace bevel gear set. Adjust bevel gear set free backlash
Incorrect gear adjustment insufficient backlash
Pinion nut loosened
Pinion or ring gear teeth worn
CAUSES REMEDY
Insufficient lubrication; contaminated oil; improper Replace bevel gear set. Carefully follow the recommended operations
lubrication for the adjustment of the bevel gear set free play. Use correct lubri-
Worn out pinion bearings cants, fill to proper levels and replace according to the recommended
schedule.
Overheated ring and pinion teeth
CAUSES REMEDY
Prolonged operation at high temperature Replace bevel gear set. Use correct lubricants, fill to proper levels and
Insufficient lubrication; contaminated oil; improper replace according to the recommended schedule.
lubrication
Pinion teeth pitting
CAUSES REMEDY
Excessive use Replace bevel gear set. Use correct lubricants, fill to proper levels and
Insufficient lubrication replace according to the recommended schedule.

Axle beam body bent


CAUSES REMEDY
Vehicle overloaded Replace axle beam body
Vehicle accident
Load bump
Worn out or pitted bearings
CAUSES REMEDY
Insufficient lubrication; contaminated oil Replace bearings, use correct lubricants, fill to proper levels and
Excessive use replace according to the recommended schedule.

Normal wear out


Pinion nut loosened

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-85


TESTING AND ADJUSTING TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
12
Oil leakage from gaskets and seals
CAUSES REMEDY
Prolonged operation at high temperature Replace the gasket or seal and matching surface if damaged. Use cor-
Oil gasket assembled incorrectly rect lubricants, fill to proper levels and replace according to the recom-
mended schedule.
Seal lip damaged
Contaminated oil
Excessive wearing out of input flange spline
CAUSES REMEDY
Exhaustive use Replace the flange. Check that the pinion spline is not excessively
Pinion nut loosened worn. Replace bevel gear set if required

Pinion axle backlash


Fatigue failure of pinion teeth
CAUSES REMEDY
Exhaustive use Replace bevel gear set
Continuous overload
Pinion and ring teeth breakage
CAUSES REMEDY
Crash load of differential components Check and/or replace other differential components
Side gear spline worn out
CAUSES REMEDY
Excessive use Replace differential gear group. Replace half shaft if required
Thrust washer surface worn out or scratched
CAUSES REMEDY
Insufficient lubrication; contaminated oil, improper Use correct lubricants, fill to proper levels and replace according to the
lubrication recommended schedule. Replace all scratched washers and those with
0.1 mm smaller thickness than the new ones
Inner diameter of tapered roller bearing worn out
CAUSES REMEDY
Excessive use axial pinion Replace bearing. Check pinion axial backlash Use correct lubricants,
Excessive pinion axial backlash fill to proper levels and replace according to the recommended sched-
ule.
Insufficient lubrication; contaminated oil
Bent or broken half shaft or half shaft broken at wheel side
CAUSES REMEDY
Vehicle intensively operated or overloaded Replace. Check that wheel support is not worn out or incorrectly
Wheel support loosened adjusted.

Beam body bent

20-86 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
12
REAR AXLE

Wheel vibration; front tire resistance; half shaft breakage.


CAUSES REMEDY
Incorrect installation Correct installation
Defective axle Replace the differential in case it does not survive any of the test
phases
Overloading/incorrect weight distribution Remove excessive weight and redistribute load following instructions
related to the vehicle
Different rotation radius of the tires Replace the tire or adjust pressure to have the same radius on both tires
Bent half shaft Replace half shaft
Steering is difficult; vehicle goes straight while trying to turn it.
CAUSES REMEDY
Incorrect installation Correct installation
Defective axle Replace the differential in case it does not survive any of the test
phases
Overloading/incorrect weight distribution Remove excessive weight and redistribute load following instructions
related to the vehicle
Different rotation radius of the tires Replace the tire or adjust pressure to have the same radius on both tires
Broken half shaft Replace half shaft
No differential action; jamming while steering.
CAUSES REMEDY
Incorrect installation Correct installation
Defective axle Replace the differential in case it does not survive any of the test
phases
Broken half shaft Replace half shaft
Bent half shaft Replace half shaft
Excess noise
CAUSES REMEDY
Incorrect installation Correct installation
Defective axle Replace the differential in case it does not survive any of the test
phases
Overloading/incorrect weight distribution Remove excessive weight and redistribute load following instructions
related to the vehicle
Different rotation radius of the tires Replace the tire or adjust pressure to have the same radius on both tires
Bent or broken half shaft Replace half shaft
Incorrect wheel adjustment Verify group integrity and wheel side bearings
Contamination in the axle box or incorrect assembly Look for foreign particles. Check for proper assembly of the various
of parts parts of the axle.

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-87


TESTING AND ADJUSTING TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
12
Uneven wear of tires
CAUSES REMEDY
Incorrect installation Correct installation
Defective axle Replace the differential in case it does not survive any of the test
phases
Overloading/incorrect weight distribution Remove excessive weight and redistribute load following instructions
related to the vehicle
Different rotation radius of the tires Replace the tire or adjust pressure to have the same radius on both tires
Bent or broken half shaft Replace half shaft
Blocked half shaft:
Abnormal functioning of the differential or Verify assembly of all components
breakage/blockage of control device.
Vehicles with wide steering angle may proceed Reduce the steering angle to minimum and decelerate when the
with kicks, have steering difficulty or cause vehicle begins to kick.
pneumatic wear on sharp turns.
Incorrect wheel adjustment Verify group integrity and wheel side bearings
Friction noise
CAUSES REMEDY
Incorrect installation Correct installation
Defective axle Replace the differential in case it does not survive any of the test
phases
Bent or broken half shaft Replace half shaft
Damaged or worn out axle parts Check the condition of the ring gear, pinion gear, bearings, etc.
Replace when necessary.
Contamination in the axle box or incorrect assembly Look for foreign particles. Check for proper assembly of the various
of parts parts of the axle.
Incorrect adjustment of bevel gear set. Replace or adjust as required.
Parts of the trans worn out transmission gears, U
joint, etc.
Vibration during forward drive, intermittent noise
CAUSES REMEDY
Incorrect installation Correct installation
Defective axle Replace the differential in case it does not survive any of the test
phases
Overloading/incorrect weight distribution Remove excessive weight and redistribute load following instructions
related to the vehicle
Bent half shaft Replace half shaft
Different rotation radius of the tires Replace the tire or adjust pressure to have the same radius on both tires

20-88 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
12
Noise while driving
CAUSES REMEDY
Excessive backlash between pinion and ring gear Adjust
Worn out pinion and ring gear Replace
Worn out pinion bearings Replace
Pinion bearings loose Adjust
Excessive axial pinion backlash Adjust
Worn out differential bearings Replace
Differential bearings loose Adjust
Ring gear out of round Replace
Low oil level Oil level
Poor or worn oil Replace
Bent half shaft Replace
Noise while driving in neutral
CAUSES REMEDY
Noises coming from axle are usually heard but not Replace or adjust (see above)
loud when vehicle moves in neutral gear.
Incorrect backlash between pinion and ring sound Replace
heard while decelerating, disappears while increas-
ing speed
Pinion or input flange worn out Adjust
Intermittent noise
CAUSES REMEDY
Ring gear damaged Replace bevel gear set
Differential box bolts loosened Tighten to torque
Constant noise
CAUSES REMEDY
Ring gear teeth or pinion damaged Replace bevel gear set
Worn out bearings Replace
Pinion spline worn out Replace
Bent half shaft Replace
Noise while steering
CAUSES REMEDY
Worn out differential gears Replace
Worn out differential box or spider Replace
Differential thrust washers worn out Replace
Half shaft spline worn out Replace

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-89


TESTING AND ADJUSTING TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
12
Ring gear teeth broken at the outer side
CAUSES REMEDY
Excessive gear load compared to the one foreseen Replace bevel gear set. Carefully follow the recommended operations
Incorrect gear adjustment, excessive backlash for the adjustment of the bevel gear set free backlash.

Pinion nut loosened


Ring gear tooth broken
CAUSES REMEDY
Load bump Replace bevel gear set. Adjust bevel gear set free backlash.
Incorrect gear adjustment, insufficient backlash
Pinion nut loosened
Pinion or ring gear teeth worn
CAUSES REMEDY
Insufficient lubrication; contaminated oil; improper Replace bevel gear set. Carefully follow the recommended operations
lubrication for the adjustment of the bevel gear set free play. Use correct lubri-
Worn out pinion bearings cants, fill to proper levels and replace according to the recommended
schedule.
Overheated ring and pinion teeth
CAUSES REMEDY
Prolonged operation at high temperature Replace bevel gear set. Use correct lubricants, fill to proper levels and
Insufficient lubrication; contaminated oil; improper replace according to the recommended schedule.
lubrication
Pinion teeth pitting
CAUSES REMEDY
Excessive use Replace bevel gear set. Use correct lubricants, fill to proper levels and
Insufficient lubrication replace according to the recommended schedule.

Axle beam body bent


CAUSES REMEDY
Vehicle overloaded Replace axle beam body
Vehicle accident
Load bump
Worn out or pitted bearings
CAUSES REMEDY
Insufficient lubrication; contaminated oil Replace bearings. Use correct lubricants, fill to proper levels and
Excessive use replace according to the recommended schedule.

Normal wear out


Pinion nut loosened

20-90 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
12
Oil leakage from gaskets and seals
CAUSES REMEDY
Prolonged operation at high temperature Replace the gasket or seal and matching surface if damaged. Use cor-
Oil gasket assembled incorrectly rect lubricants, fill to proper levels and replace according to the recom-
mended schedule.
Seal lip damaged
Contaminated oil
Excessive wearing out of input flange spline
CAUSES REMEDY
Exhaustive use Replace the flange. Check that the pinion spline is not excessively
Pinion nut loosened worn. Replace bevel gear set if required

Pinion axle backlash


Fatigue failure of pinion teeth
CAUSES REMEDY
Exhaustive use Replace bevel gear set
Continuous overload
Pinion and ring teeth breakage
CAUSES REMEDY
Crash load of differential components Check and/or replace other differential components
Side gear spline worn out
CAUSES REMEDY
Excessive use Replace differential gear group. Replace half shaft if required
Thrust washer surface worn out or scratched
CAUSES REMEDY
Lack of lubrication; contaminated oil, improper Use correct lubricants, fill to proper levels and replace according to the
lubrication recommended schedule. Replace all scratched washers and those with
0.1 mm smaller thickness than the new ones
Inner diameter of tapered roller bearing worn out
CAUSES REMEDY
Excessive use axial pinion Replace bearing. Check pinion axial backlash. Use correct lubricants,
Excessive pinion axial backlash fill to proper levels and replace according to the recommended sched-
ule.
Insufficient lubrication; contaminated oil
Bent or broken half shaft or half shaft broken at wheel side
CAUSES REMEDY
Vehicle intensively operated or overloaded Replace. Check that wheel support is not worn out or incorrectly
Wheel support loosened adjusted.

Beam body bent

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-91


TESTING AND ADJUSTING TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
12
TRANSMISSION

Vehicle does not move


CAUSES REMEDY
Faulty supply to solenoid valves Check/Replace
Damaged wiring connections between transmission Repair/Replace
and vehicle
Oxidized contacts in electrical wiring Clean
Break in electrical cable Replace
Damaged solenoids Replace
Damaged sensors Replace
Short circuits or open connections Check/replace fuses
Incorrect oil level Fill oil to proper level
Check for leaks Repair
Blocked intake filter Clean
Damaged oil pump Replace
Damaged oil pump relief valve Replace oil pump
Blocked/damaged transmission filter Replace
Damaged/jammed control valve Replace
Damaged converter Replace
Oil temperature below 0C Wait for oil to reach operating temperature (stall test)
Damaged rotary seals Replace
Damaged synchronizers Replace
Blocked reverse lever Repair
Worn clutch Replace/repair clutch
No drive transmission, broken gears, shafts, bear- Check/Repair/Replace
ings, etc.
Vehicle has reduced power transmission
CAUSES REMEDY
Incorrect oil temperature Wait for oil to reach operating temperature (stall test)
Transmission oil overheating See Overheating
Incorrect operating pressure Check hydraulic circuit and replace, oil pump, filters, control valve
Damaged converter Replace
Incorrect oil level Fill oil to proper level
Worn clutch Replace/Repair
4WD clutch failure Repair/Replace 4WD shaft group
Overheating solenoids Replace
Damaged transmission and vehicle wiring connec- Repair/Replace
tions
Damaged sensors Replace

20-92 WB140-2N WB150-2N


TESTING AND ADJUSTING TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
12
Overheating
CAUSES REMEDY
Damaged hydraulic cooling system Repair
Dirty heat exchanger Clean
Parking brake inadvertently activated Release
Excessive dirt on axle wheel hubs Clean
Seizing, broken gears, shafts, bearings, etc. Check/Repair/Replace
Braking force outside transmission: irregular axle Check/Repair axle
operation
Clutch plate drag Repair/Replace
Damaged converter Replace
Damaged oil thermostat Replace
Incorrect oil level Add oil
Worn oil pump Replace
Wheels rotate when vehicle is raised
CAUSES REMEDY
Clutch plate drag Repair/Replace
Low oil temperature (high oil viscosity) Wail for oil to reach operating temperature (stall test)
Incorrect oil specifications Replace oil and filters
Damaged control valve Replace
Faulty reverser locking Repair/Replace
Noise
CAUSES REMEDY
Damaged converter Replace
Damaged oil pump Replace
Aeration/Cavitation Check oil level
Seizing (broken gears, shafts, bearings, etc.) Check/Repair/Replace
Worn clutch plates Replace
Irregular actuation
CAUSES REMEDY
Damaged control valve Replace
Electrical system fault Repair/Replace
Worn clutch plates Replace
Damaged converter Replace
Low oil temperature (high oil viscosity) Wail for oil to reach operating temperature (stall test)
Overheating See Overheating
Damaged hydraulic system Repair/Replace

WB140-2N WB150-2N 20-93


TESTING AND ADJUSTING TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
12
Gear remains engaged
CAUSES REMEDY
Damaged/jammed shuttle shaft lever Repair/Replace
Electrical system fault Repair/Replace
Damaged control valve Replace
Damaged hydraulic system Repair/Replace
Damaged clutch Repair/Replace
Damaged gear lever rod Replace
Damaged synchronizer Replace
No 4WD power transmission
CAUSES REMEDY
Damaged 4WD clutch Replace
Hydraulic system fault Repair/Replace
Damaged control valve Replace
Faulty brake sensor Check/Replace
Electrical system fault Repair/Replace
Gear shift will not engage
CAUSES REMEDY
Damaged shifter Replace
Damaged synchronizer Replace

20-94 WB140-2N WB150-2N


90 OTHERS

HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-3


STANDARD CONTROLS FOR WB140-2N SHEET 1 OF 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-3
STANDARD CONTROLS FOR WB140-2N SHEET 2 OF 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-5
STANDARD CONTROLS FOR WB150-2N SHEET 1 OF 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-7
STANDARD CONTROLS FOR WB150-2N SHEET 2 OF 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-9
PPC SYSTEM FOR WB140-2N SHEET 1 OF 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-11
PPC SYSTEM FOR WB140-2N SHEET 2 OF 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-13
PPC SYSTEM FOR WB140-2N SHEET 3 OF 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-15
PPC SYSTEM FOR WB150-2N SHEET 1 OF 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-17
PPC SYSTEM FOR WB150-2N SHEET 2 OF 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-19
PPC SYSTEM FOR WB150-2N SHEET 3 OF 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-21
ELECTRICAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-23
CAB WIRING SCHEMATIC SHEET 1 OF 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-23
CAB WIRING SCHEMATIC SHEET 2 OF 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-25
CAB WIRING SCHEMATIC SHEET 3 OF 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-27
CAB WIRING SCHEMATIC SHEET 4 OF 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-29
CAB WIRING SCHEMATIC SHEET 5 OF 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-31
LEGEND FOR CAB WIRING SCHEMATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-33
CANOPY WIRING SCHEMATIC SHEET 1 OF 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-35
CANOPY WIRING SCHEMATIC SHEET 2 OF 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-37
CANOPY WIRING SCHEMATIC SHEET 3 OF 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-39
CANOPY WIRING SCHEMATIC SHEET 4 OF 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-41
CANOPY WIRING SCHEMATIC SHEET 5 OF 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-43
LEGEND FOR CANOPY WIRING SCHEMATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-45
TIER I ENGINE HARNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-47
TIER II ENGINE HARNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-49
LEGEND FOR TIER I AND II ENGINE HARNESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-51
FRONT HARNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-53
LEGEND FOR FRONT HARNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-55
LATERAL HARNESS AND SIDE DASHBOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-57
TIER I ENGINE SHEET 1 OF 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-57
TIER I ENGINE SHEET 2 OF 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-59
LEGEND FOR TIER I ENGINE LATERAL AND SIDE DASH BOARD
HARNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-61
TIER II ENGINE SHEET 1 OF 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-63
TIER II ENGINE SHEET 2 OF 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-65
LEGEND FOR TIER II ENGINE LATERAL SIDE DASH BOARD HARNESS . 90-67
PPC FRAME AND SIDE DASH BOARD HARNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-69
FRAME HARNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-69
SIDE DASH BOARD HARNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-71

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-1


OTHERS TABLE OF CONTENTS

LEGEND FOR PPC FRAME AND SIDE DASH BOARD HARNESS . . . . . . . . . 90-73
WORK LIGHT HARNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-75
FUSE AND RELAY PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-77
LEGEND FOR FUSE AND RELAY PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-77

90-2 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
12
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
STANDARD CONTROLS FOR WB140-2N SHEET 1 OF 2

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-3


OTHERS HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
12

90-4 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
12
STANDARD CONTROLS FOR WB140-2N SHEET 2 OF 2

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-5


OTHERS HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
12

90-6 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
12
STANDARD CONTROLS FOR WB150-2N SHEET 1 OF 2

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-7


OTHERS HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
12

90-8 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
12
STANDARD CONTROLS FOR WB150-2N SHEET 2 OF 2

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-9


OTHERS HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
12

90-10 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
12
PPC SYSTEM FOR WB140-2N SHEET 1 OF 3

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-11


OTHERS HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
12

90-12 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
12
PPC SYSTEM FOR WB140-2N SHEET 2 OF 3

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-13


OTHERS HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
12

90-14 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
12
PPC SYSTEM FOR WB140-2N SHEET 3 OF 3

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-15


OTHERS HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
12

90-16 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
12
PPC SYSTEM FOR WB150-2N SHEET 1 OF 3

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-17


OTHERS HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
12

90-18 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
12
PPC SYSTEM FOR WB150-2N SHEET 2 OF 3

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-19


OTHERS HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
12

90-20 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
12
PPC SYSTEM FOR WB150-2N SHEET 3 OF 3

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-21


OTHERS HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
12

90-22 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12
ELECTRICAL
CAB WIRING SCHEMATIC SHEET 1 OF 5

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-23


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12

90-24 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12
CAB WIRING SCHEMATIC SHEET 2 OF 5

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-25


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12

90-26 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12
CAB WIRING SCHEMATIC SHEET 3 OF 5

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-27


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12

90-28 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12
CAB WIRING SCHEMATIC SHEET 4 OF 5

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-29


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12

90-30 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12
CAB WIRING SCHEMATIC SHEET 5 OF 5

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-31


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12

90-32 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12
LEGEND FOR CAB WIRING SCHEMATIC
ITEM DESCRIPTION SHEET ITEM DESCRIPTION SHEET ITEM DESCRIPTION SHEET ITEM DESCRIPTION SHEET ITEM DESCRIPTION SHEET
EV1 MP Bucket Open Solenoid 5 of 5 H16 Cab Light 4 of 5 P1 Tachometer 2 of 5 C1 A/C Magnetic Clutch 5 of 5 X67 Seat Sensor, 3 Pin 5 of 5
EV2 MP Bucket Close Solenoid 5 of 5 H17 Front Work Light 4 of 5 P2 Hour Meter 2 of 5 XC1 Lighter Socket 3 of 5 XA Alternator, 2 Pin 5 of 5
EV3 Diff Lock Solenoid 5 of 5 H18 Front Work Light 4 of 5 P3 Fuel Level Gauge 2 of 5 X1 Engine Harness, 11 Pin 2 of 5 XAM Fuel Shutoff Valve, 3 Pin 5 of 5
EV4 Boom Lock Solenoid 5 of 5 H19 Beacon Light 4 of 5 P4 Coolant Temp Gauge 2 of 5 X2 Lights and Gear Shift, 9 Pin 1 of 5 XD1 Light Switch, 9 Pin 1 of 5
F1A Low Beam Fuse, 15A 1 of 5 H20 Rear Work Light 4 of 5 R30 Heating Start 5 of 5 X3 Front Line, 11 Pin 1 of 5 XD2 Gear Shift, 5 Pin 1 of 5
F1B Right Light Fuse, 3A 2 of 5 H21 Rear Work Light 4 of 5 R31 Fuel Level Sender 5 of 5 X4 Not Used, 11 Pin 1 of 5 XM9 Fuel Pump, 2 Pin 5 of 5
F1C Left Light Fuse, 3A 2 of 5 H22 Indicators Warn Light 1 of 5 R32 Coolant Temp Sender 5 of 5 X5 Cab Controls, 11 Pin 3 of 5 XS Instrument Panel, 6 Pin 2 of 5
F2A Fuse, 10A Not Used 2 of 5 H23 High Beam Warn Light 1 of 5 R33 Alternator 5 of 5 X6 Trans Solenoids, 9 Pin 1 of 5 XT1 Fuel Shutoff Timer, 4 Pin 5 of 5
F2B Cab Fuse, 15A 3 of 5 H24 Brake Oil Warn Light 1 of 5 S1 ECO Power Button 5 of 5 X7 Not Used, 9 Pin 3 of 5 XT2 Preheat Timer, 4 Pin 5 of 5
F2C Hazard Fuse, 10A 2 of 5 H25 Diff Lock Warn Light 1 of 5 S2 Boom Unlock Switch 4 of 5 X8 Side Dashboard, 17 Pins 2 of 5 XK12 Seat Unit, 6 Pin 5 of 5
F3A Stp Seat DL Fuse, 7.5A 2 of 5 H28 Right Front Light 2 of 5 S4 Blower Motor Switch 3 of 5 X9 Front Dashboard, 17 Pins 1 of 5 XK13 Stop Light Diff Lock, 6 Pin 4 of 5
F3B Instr. Warn RTD, 10A 2 of 5 H29 Left Front Light 1 of 5 S6 Starting Switch 2 of 5 X10 To Engine Harness, 13 Pin 4 of 5
F3C MPB Declutch Fuse, 7.5A 1 of 5 H36 Rear Left Side Lights 4 of 5 S10 Declutch Button 5 of 5 X11 2 Way Power, 2 Pin 4 of 5
F4A 4WD Ft Washer Fuse, 7.5A 2 of 5 H37 Rear Right Side Lights 4 of 5 S13 Battery Cut Off Switch 5 of 5 X12 Front Cross Over, 2 Pin 4 of 5
F4B F/R BUA Fuse, 10A 1 of 5 H38 Courtesy Light 4 of 5 S15 Hand Brake Switch 3 of 5 X16 AC Clutch, 2 Pin 5 of 5
F4C High Beam Fuse, 15A 1 of 5 HA1 Horn 5 of 5 S16 Brake Oil Level Low Switch 1 of 5 X17 Side Dashboard, 21 Pin 2 of 5
F5A Heater Relay Fuse, 10A 3 of 5 HA2 Buzzer 2 of 5 S17 Brake Pressure Switch 1 of 5 X18 Front Cable, 5 Pin 2 of 5
F5B Rear Work Light, 15A 3 of 5 HA3 Fuel Shut Off Relay 3 of 5 S18 Brake Pressure Switch 1 of 5 X19 Front Dashboard, 9 Pin 2 of 5
F5C Front Work Light, 15A 2 of 5 HA4 Back Up Alarm 3 of 5 S19 Seat Sensor 5 of 5 X20 Blower Motor 3 of 5
F6A Rear Wiper Front Horn, 15A 3 of 5 K01 Starter Relay 5 of 5 S21 Coolant High Temp Switch 5 of 5 X21 Fuel Level Indicator, 3 Pin 5 of 5
F6B Light Sel Horn Relay, 7.5A 1 of 5 K02 Preheat Relay 5 of 5 S22 Air Filter Clogged Switch 5 of 5 X22 Washer Pump, 2 Pin 2 of 5
F6C Direction Lights, 10A 2 of 5 K03 Fuel Shut Off Relay 5 of 5 S23 Lo Eng Oil Pres Switch 5 of 5 X23 Optional, 2 Pin 1 of 5
F7A Fuse, 7.5A Not Used 1 of 5 K04 AC Blower Relay 3 of 5 S24 Fuel Gauge 5 of 5 X24 Front Wiper, 4 Pin 1 of 5
F7B Front Horn Fuse, 10A 1 of 5 K05 Return to Dig Relay 2 of 5 S26 Trans Oil Temp Switch 3 of 5 X25 Blower Motor, 2 Pin 3 of 5
F7C Fuel Shut Off Fuse, 7.5 A 2 of 5 K06 Power ECO Unit 5 of 5 S27 Return to Dig Sensor 3 of 5 X26 Rear Line, 8 Pin 4 of 5
FUG1 Key Switch Fuse, 60A 5 of 5 KC Load Fan Heater Relay 3 of 5 S37 Rear Door Switch 3 of 5 X27 Valve Lines, 6 Pin 5 of 5
FUG2 Preheat Switch Fuse, 80A 5 of 5 K1 Forward Direction Relay 1 of 5 S1A 4WD Switch 1 of 5 X28 Loader Lever, 12 Pin 5 of 5
FUG3 FSO Power Fuse, 40A 5 of 5 K2 Reverse Direction Relay 1 of 5 S1L Rear Work Light Switch 3 of 5 X29 Declutch Button, 2 Pin 5 of 5
FUG4 Heater A/C Fuse, 40A 5 of 5 K3 4WD Relay 1 of 5 S2A Front Wiper/Washer Switch 1 of 5 X30 Transfer Fuel Pump, 2 Pin 5 of 5
G1 Battery 5 of 5 K4 Neutral Position Relay 2 of 5 S2L Rear Wiper/Washer Switch 3 of 5 X31 Cab, 5 Pin 4 of 5
G2 Alternator 5 of 5 K5 Low Beam Relay 1 of 5 S3A Front Work Light 1 of 5 X32 Radio, 2 Pin 3 of 5
H1 Preheat Warn Light 2 of 5 K6 Main Beam Relay 1 of 5 S3L Rotary Beacon Switch 3 of 5 X33 Wiper and Beacon, 7 Pin 3 of 5
H2 Alternator Warn Light 2 of 5 K7 Gear Relay 1 of 5 S4A Warning Switch 1 of 5 X34 Right Front Light, 6 Pin 2 of 5
H3 Coolant Warn Light 2 of 5 K8 Front Horn Relay 1 of 5 S4L Horn Switch 3 of 5 X35 Left Front Light, 6 Pin 1 of 5
H4 Eng Oil Pressure Warn Light 2 of 5 K9 Flasher Unit 1 of 5 S5L Optional Switch 3 of 5 X38 F and R Solenoids, 4 Pin 1 of 5
H5 Air Filter Warn Light 2 of 5 K12 Seat Unit 5 of 5 SM2 Power Button 5 of 5 X39 Proximity, 3 Pin 3 of 5
H6 Hyd Oil Filter Warn Light 2 of 5 K13 Stop Light, Diff Lock Unit 4 of 5 SM3 MPB Grab Button 5 of 5 X40 Flasher Unit, 13 Pin 1 of 5
H7 Opt Warn Light 2 of 5 KT1 Fuel Shut Off Timer 5 of 5 SM4 Converter Declutch Button 5 of 5 X41 4WD Solenoid, 2 Pins 1 of 5
H8 Opt Warn Light 2 of 5 KT2 Preheater Timer 5 of 5 SM5 MPB Open Button 5 of 5 X43 Power Relay, 7 Pin 3 of 5
H9 Coolant Warn Light 1 of 5 M1 Starter Motor 5 of 5 SM6 Differential Lock Button 5 of 5 X45 Power ECO Unit, 5 Pin 5 of 5
H10 Converter Temp Warn Light 1 of 5 M2 Washer Pump 2 of 5 Y0 Fuel Shutoff Solenoid Valve 5 of 5 X46 Rear Wiper, 4 Pin 5 of 5
H11 4WD Warn Light 1 of 5 M3 Windshield Wiper Motor 5 of 5 Y1 Eco Power Solenoid Valve 5 of 5 X47 Beacon Light, 2 Pin 4 of 5
H12 Low Fuel Warn Light 1 of 5 M4 Blower Motor 3 of 5 Y2 4WD Solenoid 1 of 5 X53 AC Interface, 1 Pin 3 of 5
H13 Komatsu Logo Light 1 of 5 M5 Transfer Fuel Pump 5 of 5 Y4 Forward Solenoid 1 of 5 X59 Front Line Cross, 6 Pin 4 of 5
H14 Komatsu Logo Light 1 of 5 M8 Windshield Wiper Motor 1 of 5 Y5 Reverse Solenoid 1 of 5 X60 Optional, 1 Pin 1 of 5
H15 Lighter Light 3 of 5 M9 Fuel Pump 5 of 5 Y6 Return to Dig Magnet 3 of 5 X63 Alternator Resistance, 2 Pin 5 of 5

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-33


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12

90-34 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12
CANOPY WIRING SCHEMATIC SHEET 1 OF 5

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-35


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12

90-36 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12
CANOPY WIRING SCHEMATIC SHEET 2 OF 5

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-37


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12

90-38 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12
CANOPY WIRING SCHEMATIC SHEET 3 OF 5

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-39


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12

90-40 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12
CANOPY WIRING SCHEMATIC SHEET 4 OF 5

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-41


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12

90-42 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12
CANOPY WIRING SCHEMATIC SHEET 5 OF 5

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-43


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12

90-44 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12
LEGEND FOR CANOPY WIRING SCHEMATIC
ITEM DESCRIPTION SHEET ITEM DESCRIPTION SHEET ITEM DESCRIPTION SHEET ITEM DESCRIPTION SHEET
EV1 MP Bucket Open Solenoid 5 of 5 H17 Front Work Light 4 of 5 R33 Alternator 5 of 5 X11 2 Way Power, 2 Pin 4 of 5
EV2 MP Bucket Close Solenoid 5 of 5 H18 Front Work Light 4 of 5 S1 ECO Power Button 5 of 5 X12 Front Cross Over, 2 Pin 4 of 5
EV3 Diff Lock Solenoid 5 of 5 H19 Beacon Light 4 of 5 S2 Boom Unlock Switch 4 of 5 X17 Side Dashboard, 21 Pin 2 of 5
EV4 Boom Lock Solenoid 5 of 5 H20 Rear Work Light 4 of 5 S6 Starting Switch 2 of 5 X18 Front Cable, 5 Pin 2 of 5
F1A Low Beam Fuse, 15A 1 of 5 H21 Rear Work Light 4 of 5 S10 Declutch Button 5 of 5 X19 Front Dashboard, 9 Pin 2 of 5
F1B Right Light Fuse, 3A 2 of 5 H22 Indicators Warn Light 1 of 5 S13 Battery Cut Off Switch 5 of 5 X21 Fuel Level Indicator, 3 Pin 5 of 5
F1C Left Light Fuse, 3A 2 of 5 H23 High Beam Warn Light 1 of 5 S15 Hand Brake Switch 3 of 5 X23 Optional, 2 Pin 1 of 5
F2A Fuse, 10A Not Used 2 of 5 H24 Brake Oil Warn Light 1 of 5 S16 Brake Oil Level Low Switch 1 of 5 X26 Rear Line, 8 Pin 4 of 5
F2B Canopy Fuse, 15A 3 of 5 H25 Diff Lock Warn Light 1 of 5 S17 Brake Pressure Switch 1 of 5 X27 Valve Lines, 6 Pin 5 of 5
F2C Hazard Fuse, 10A 2 of 5 H28 Right Front Light 2 of 5 S18 Brake Pressure Switch 1 of 5 X28 Loader Lever, 12 Pin 5 of 5
F3A Stp Seat DL Fuse, 7.5A 2 of 5 H29 Left Front Light 1 of 5 S19 Seat Sensor 5 of 5 X29 Declutch Button, 2 Pin 5 of 5
F3B Instr. Warn RTD, 10A 2 of 5 H36 Rear Left Side Lights 4 of 5 S21 Coolant High Temp Switch 5 of 5 X30 Transfer Fuel Pump, 2 Pin 5 of 5
F3C MPB Declutch Fuse, 7.5A 1 of 5 H37 Rear Right Side Lights 4 of 5 S22 Air Filter Clogged Switch 5 of 5 X31 Canopy, 5 Pin 4 of 5
F4A 4WD Fuse, 7.5A 2 of 5 H38 Courtesy Light 4 of 5 S23 Lo Eng Oil Pres Switch 5 of 5 X33 Beacon, 7 Pin 3 of 5
F4B F/R BUA Fuse, 10A 1 of 5 HA1 Horn 5 of 5 S24 Fuel Gauge 5 of 5 X34 Right Front Light, 6 Pin 2 of 5
F4C High Beam Fuse, 15A 1 of 5 HA2 Buzzer 2 of 5 S26 Trans Oil Temp Switch 3 of 5 X35 Left Front Light, 6 Pin 1 of 5
F5A Fuse, 10A Not Used 3 of 5 HA3 Fuel Shut Off Relay 3 of 5 S27 Return to Dig Sensor 3 of 5 X38 F and R Solenoids, 4 Pin 1 of 5
F5B Rear Work Light, 15A 3 of 5 HA4 Back Up Alarm 3 of 5 S1A 4WD Switch 1 of 5 X39 Proximity, 3 Pin 3 of 5
F5C Front Work Light, 15A 2 of 5 K01 Starter Relay 5 of 5 S1L Rear Work Light Switch 3 of 5 X40 Flasher Unit, 13 Pin 1 of 5
F6A Rear Wiper Front Horn, 15A 3 of 5 K02 Preheat Relay 5 of 5 S3A Front Work Light 1 of 5 X41 4WD Solenoid, 2 Pins 1 of 5
F6B Light Sel Horn Relay, 7.5A 1 of 5 K03 Fuel Shut Off Relay 5 of 5 S3L Rotary Beacon Switch 3 of 5 X43 Power Relay, 7 Pin 3 of 5
F6C Direction Lights, 10A 2 of 5 K05 Return to Dig Relay 2 of 5 S4A Warning Switch 1 of 5 X45 Power ECO Unit, 5 Pin 5 of 5
F7A Fuse, 7.5A Not Used 1 of 5 K06 Power ECO Unit 5 of 5 S4L Horn Switch 3 of 5 X47 Beacon Light, 2 Pin 4 of 5
F7B Front Horn Fuse, 10A 1 of 5 K1 Forward Direction Relay 1 of 5 S5L Optional Switch 3 of 5 X59 Front Line Cross, 6 Pin 4 of 5
F7C Fuel Shut Off Fuse, 7.5 A 2 of 5 K2 Reverse Direction Relay 1 of 5 SM2 Power Button 5 of 5 X60 Optional, 1 Pin 1 of 5
FUG1 Key Switch Fuse, 60A 5 of 5 K3 4WD Relay 1 of 5 SM3 MPB Grab Button 5 of 5 X63 Alternator Resistance, 2 Pin 5 of 5
FUG2 Preheat Switch Fuse, 80A 5 of 5 K4 Neutral Position Relay 2 of 5 SM4 Converter Declutch Button 5 of 5 X65 Optional Light, 1 Pin 2 of 5
FUG3 FSO Power Fuse, 40A 5 of 5 K5 Low Beam Relay 1 of 5 SM5 MPB Open Button 5 of 5 X66 Optional Light, 1 Pin 3 of 5
FUG4 Fuse, 40A Not Used 5 of 5 K6 Main Beam Relay 1 of 5 SM6 Differential Lock Button 5 of 5 X67 Seat Sensor, 3 Pin 5 of 5
G1 Battery 5 of 5 K7 Gear Relay 1 of 5 Y0 Fuel Shutoff Solenoid Valve 5 of 5 XA Alternator, 2 Pin 5 of 5
G2 Alternator 5 of 5 K8 Front Horn Relay 1 of 5 Y1 Eco Power Solenoid Valve 5 of 5 XAM Fuel Shutoff Valve, 3 Pin 5 of 5
H1 Preheat Warn Light 2 of 5 K9 Flasher Unit 1 of 5 Y2 4WD Solenoid 1 of 5 XD1 Light Switch, 9 Pin 1 of 5
H2 Alternator Warn Light 2 of 5 K12 Seat Unit 5 of 5 Y4 Forward Solenoid 1 of 5 XD2 Gear Shift, 5 Pin 1 of 5
H3 Coolant Warn Light 2 of 5 K13 Stop Light, Diff Lock Unit 4 of 5 Y5 Reverse Solenoid 1 of 5 XM9 Fuel Pump, 2 Pin 5 of 5
H4 Eng Oil Pressure Warn Light 2 of 5 KT1 Fuel Shut Off Timer 5 of 5 Y6 Return to Dig Magnet 3 of 5 XS Instrument Panel, 6 Pin 2 of 5
H5 Air Filter Warn Light 2 of 5 KT2 Preheater Timer 5 of 5 XC1 Lighter Socket 3 of 5 XT1 Fuel Shutoff Timer, 4 Pin 5 of 5
H6 Hyd Oil Filter Warn Light 2 of 5 M1 Starter Motor 5 of 5 X1 Engine Harness, 11 Pin 2 of 5 XT2 Preheat Timer, 4 Pin 5 of 5
H7 Opt Warn Light 2 of 5 M5 Transfer Fuel Pump 5 of 5 X2 Lights and Gear Shift, 9 Pin 1 of 5 XK12 Seat Unit, 6 Pin 5 of 5
H8 Opt Warn Light 2 of 5 M9 Fuel Pump 5 of 5 X3 Front Line, 11 Pin 1 of 5 XK13 Stop Light Diff Lock, 6 Pin 4 of 5
H9 Coolant Warn Light 1 of 5 P1 Tachometer 2 of 5 X4 Not Used, 11 Pin 1 of 5
H10 Converter Temp Warn Light 1 of 5 P2 Hour Meter 2 of 5 X5 Canopy Controls, 11 Pin 3 of 5
H11 4WD Warn Light 1 of 5 P3 Fuel Level Gauge 2 of 5 X6 Trans Solenoids, 9 Pin 1 of 5
H12 Low Fuel Warn Light 1 of 5 P4 Coolant Temp Gauge 2 of 5 X7 Not Used, 9 Pin 3 of 5
H13 Komatsu Logo Light 1 of 5 R30 Heating Start 5 of 5 X8 Side Dashboard, 17 Pins 2 of 5
H14 Komatsu Logo Light 1 of 5 R31 Fuel Level Sender 5 of 5 X9 Front Dashboard, 17 Pins 1 of 5
H15 Lighter Light 3 of 5 R32 Coolant Temp Sender 5 of 5 X10 To Engine Harness, 13 Pin 4 of 5

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-45


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12

90-46 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12
TIER I ENGINE HARNESS

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-47


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12

90-48 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12
TIER II ENGINE HARNESS

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-49


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12

90-50 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12
LEGEND FOR TIER I AND II ENGINE HARNESSES
TIER I ENGINE TIER II ENGINE
No. Connector Description No. Connector Description
A X10 To Front Line A K03 Fuel Shut Off Relay
b X13 To Front Line b X61 Safety Relays
c XAD Coolant Temperature with Diode c X10 To Front Line
d Ground d X02
e X11 +30 +50 e X63
f Ground f X11 +30 +50
g Ground g Ground
h Ground h Ground
i S23 Oil Temperature i Ground
j XAM Fuel Shut Off j S23 Oil Temperature
1) +30 Starter Motor 1) XAM Fuel Shut Off
1! +50 Starter Motor 1! M9 Fuel Pump
1@ W RPM (Tachometer) Indicator 1@ +50 +50
1# XA Alternator 1# +30 +30
1$ B+ 1$ +30 +30
1% S21 Coolant Temperature 1% W RPM (Tachometer) Indicator
1^ S22 Air Filter Clogged Switch 1^ XA Alternator
1& S22 Air Filter Clogged Switch 1& S21 Coolant Temperature
1* R32 Coolant Temperature 1* S22 Air Filter Clogged Switch
1( X16 AC Magnetic Clutch 1( R32 Coolant Temperature
2) HA1 Horn 2) X16 AC Magnetic Clutch
2! HA1 Horn 2! HA1 Horn
2@ R30 Preheat Grid Block 2@ R30 Preheat Grid Block
2# K02 Preheat Relay 2# GND2 Ground
2$ K02 Preheat Relay 2$ KT2 Preheat Relay
2% K02 Preheat Relay 2% X64 Preheat Start Relay
2^ XT2 Preheat Timer Excitation 2^ XT2 Preheat Timer Excitation
2& XT1 Fuel Shut Off Timer 2& XT1 Fuel Shut Off Timer
2* 80A Fuse 2* 80A Fuse
2( 30A Fuse 2( 30A Fuse
3) 60A Fuse 3) 60A Fuse
3! 30A Fuse 3! 30A Fuse
3@ Fuse Ground 3@ Fuse Ground
3# Matcher 3# Matcher
3$ 12V 70A Relay 3$ 12V 70A Relay
3% Timer 3% Timer
3^ Timer 3^ Timer
3& Relay 3& Relay
3* Control Box 3* Control Box
3( K03 Fuel Shut Off Relay 3( Power Box
4( K01 Starting Relay

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-51


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12

90-52 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12
FRONT HARNESS

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-53


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12

90-54 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12
LEGEND FOR FRONT HARNESS
TIER I ENGINE
No. Connector Description
A X18 Power Box
B X12 Power +30 +50
C X59 To Platform Cable
D X23 Optional
E X35 Front Left Light
F X10 To Engine Harness
G X11 Power +30 +50
H GND Ground
I S18 Stop Light Switch
J S17 Stop Light Switch
1) S16 Brake Oil Level Switch
1! X22 Washer Pump
1@ X34 Front Right Light
1# X1 Electronic Board
1$ X3 Electronic Board
1% X60 Optional
1^ +30 Electronic Board

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-55


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12

90-56 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12
LATERAL HARNESS AND SIDE DASHBOARD
TIER I ENGINE SHEET 1 OF 2

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-57


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12

90-58 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12
TIER I ENGINE SHEET 2 OF 2

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-59


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12

90-60 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12
LEGEND FOR TIER I ENGINE LATERAL AND SIDE DASH BOARD HARNESS
TIER I ENGINE
No. Connector Description No. Connector Description
A X19 To Front Dash Board 4! Connectors
b +15 Electronic Board 4@ Battery Warning Light
c X8 Electronic Board 4# Preheat Warning Light
d X5 Electronic Board 4$ Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light
e X27 Solenoid Valves 4% Engine Air Filter Warning Light
f X28 Loader Control Lever 4^ Tachometer/Hour Meter
g X39 Return Sender 4& Fuel Level Gauge
h Return Valve 4* Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
i Ground 4( Buzzer
j X25 Electric Bridge 5) Optional Warning Light
1) K04 Heater Motor Relay 5! Engine Coolant Temp Warning Light
1! K05 Return Relay 5@ Hydraulic Oil Filter Warning Light
1@ K06 Power EC Relay 5# Starting Switch
1# S4 Heater 5$ S3 Beacon Lamp Switch
1$ X31 Cab/Canopy 5% Connectors
1% AC Kit 5^ S2 Optional Switch
1^ X17 Side Dash Board 5& Connectors
1& X15 Starting Switch 5* S1 Work Light Switch
1* S3 Not Used 5( Connectors
1( S2 Relay Valve Switch 6) To Platform Cable
2) S1 Economy Power Button
2! Lighter
2@ X32 Radio
2# X26 Rear Light Cable
2$ Parking Brake Switch
2% Rear Horn
2^ Not Used
2& Back Up Alarm
2* X20 Heater Motor
2( X29 Converter Detach - 2nd Button
3) Economy Power with Diode
3! X30 Fuel Pump
3@ X21 Fuel Float
3# X12 To Front Cable
3$ X14 To Front Cable
3% X43 Wiring Gear Switch
3^ To Platform Cable
3& Wiper Switch
3* Optional Switch
3( Connectors
4) Rear Horn Switch

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-61


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12

90-62 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12
TIER II ENGINE SHEET 1 OF 2

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-63


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12

90-64 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12
TIER II ENGINE SHEET 2 OF 2

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-65


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12

90-66 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12
LEGEND FOR TIER II ENGINE LATERAL SIDE DASH BOARD HARNESS
TIER II ENGINE
No. Connector Description No. Connector Description
A X19 To Front Dash Board 3( X15 +15 Electronic Board
b X5 Electronic Board 4) X17 To Platform Harness
c X8 Electronic Board 4! Light
d X27 Solenoid Valves 4@ S3L Beacon Light Switch
e X28 Loader Control Lever 4# S2L Front Wiper Switch
f X39 Return to Dig Sensor 4$ S1L Work Light Switch
g Y6 RTD Valve 4% HA Lamp
h Ground 4^ Lamp
i X25 Electronic Bridge 4& Lamp
j K04 3 Speed Fan Relay - AC 4* Fuel Gauge
1) K05 RTD Relay 4( Battery Warning Light
1! KC Load Fan Relay 5) Preheater Warning Light
1@ K12 Not Used 5! Light
1# K06 Power Economy Unit 5@ Engine Air Filter Warning Light
1$ K13 Relay 5# Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light
1% S4 Heater 5$ S4L Switch
1^ X53 AC Kit 5% S5L Switch
1& X31 Cab/Canopy 5^ +15
1* X17 Side Dash Board 5& X33 Cab/Canopy
1( S6 Starting Switch 5* X65 Rear Work Light
2) S3 Not Used 5( X66 Rear Work Light
2! S2 Boom Unlock Switch
2@ S1 Economy Power Switch
2# XC1 Lighter
2$ X32 Radio
2% X26 Rear Work Light
2^ X67 Not Used
2& S15 Parking Brake Switch
2* HA3 Rear Horn
2( Y3 Not Used
3) HA4 Back Up Alarm
3! X20 Heater Motor
3@ X29 Converter Detach - 2nd Button
3# Y1 Economy Power
3$ X30 Fuel Pump
3% X21 Fuel Float
3^ X43 To 4th Gear Relay
3& X12 Power Supply
3* X59 Front Wiring Interface

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-67


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12

90-68 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12
PPC FRAME AND SIDE DASH BOARD HARNESS
FRAME HARNESS

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-69


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12

90-70 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12
SIDE DASH BOARD HARNESS

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-71


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12

90-72 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12
LEGEND FOR PPC FRAME AND SIDE DASH BOARD HARNESS
No. Connector Description
A X55 To Cab/Canopy Wiring
b Y25 Arm Block Solenoid Valve
c GND Ground
d Y14 PPC Solenoid Valve
e Y15 Left Outrigger Down Solenoid Valve
f Y16 Right Outrigger Up Solenoid Valve
g Y22 Telescopic Extend
h Y21 Telescopic Retract
i Y20 Hammer Solenoid Valve
j S43 Hammer Foot Switch
1) Y18 Left Turn Solenoid Valve
1! Y17 Right Turn Solenoid Valve
1@ X57 Left Lever
1# HA3 Horn
1$ HA4 Horn
1% Y19 Not Used
1^ X58 Right Lever
1& Y23 Right Outrigger Down Solenoid Valve
1* Y24 Left Outrigger Up Solenoid Valve
1( X55 From Platform Harness
2) X1 Seat Swivel Switch
2! X3 Backhoe Lock Out Switch
2@ X2 Boom Lock Switch
2# X42c Power Right Outrigger Switch
2$ X42b Up Right Outrigger Switch
2% X42a Down Right Outrigger Switch
2^ X41c Power Left Outrigger Switch
2& X41b Up Left Outrigger Switch
2* X41a Down Left Outrigger Switch
2( X40 Power Economy Switch
3) X10 Telephone Exchange Relay
3! X11 Relay
3@ X9 15A Fuse
3# X4 Power from Key Switch

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-73


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12

90-74 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12
WORK LIGHT HARNESS

No. Connector Description


A Ground
B Front Work Light
C Front Work Light
D Rear Work Light
E Rear Work Light
F Rear Relay
G Front Relay
H 25A Fuse

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-75


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12

90-76 WB140-2N WB150-2N


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12
FUSE AND RELAY PANEL
LEGEND FOR FUSE AND RELAY PANEL
TIER I ENGINE TIER II ENGINE
Position Description Position Description
F1 A 15A Light Blue for Low Beam F1 A 15A Light Blue for Low Beam
F1 B 3A Violet for Parking Lights F1 B 3A Violet for Parking Lights
F1 C 3A Violet for Parking Lights F1 C 3A Violet for Parking Lights
F2 A 10A Red for Lighter F2 A 10A Red
F2 B 7.5A Brown for Dome Light Radio F2 B 15A Light Blue for Cab Features
F2 C 10A Red for Emergency Power Supply F2 C 10A Red for Emergency Power Supply
F3 A 7.5A Brown for Start Enable F3 A 7.5A Brown for Stop Lights Differential Lock
F3 B 7.5A Brown for Instruments Switch Lights F3 B 7.5A Brown for Instruments Lights RTD
F3 C 7.5A Brown for OPT Solenoid F3 C 7.5A Brown for Opt Solenoid Trans Disengage
F4 A 7.5A Brown for Diff Lock Solenoid Valve F4 A 7.5A Brown for 4WD Front Wiper
F4 B 10A Red for Direction Selector F4 B 10A Red for Direction Selector
F4 C 15A Light Blue for High Beam F4 C 15A Light Blue for High Beam
F5 A 15A Light Blue for Heater F5 A 10A Red for Heater Motor Power Econ Unit
F5 B 15A Light Blue for Rear Work Light F5 B 15A Light Blue for Rear Work Light
F5 C 15A Light Blue for Front Work Light F5 C 15A Light Blue for Front Work Light
F6 A 15A Light Blue for Wiper and Beacon F6 A 15A Light Blue for Rear Horn Rear Wiper
F6 B 7.5A Brown for Dimmer Switch Horn Relay F6 B 7.5A Brown for Dimmer Switch Horn Relay
F6 C 10A Red for Directional Indicators F6 C 10A Red for Directional Indicators
F7 A 7.5A Brown for Monitor F7 A 7.5A Brown
F7 B 10A Red for Horn F7 B 10A Red for Front Horn
F7 C 7.5A Brown for Alt Excitation Stop Solenoid F7 C 7.5A Brown for Engine Stop Solenoid

K1 Forward Gear Relay K1 Forward Gear Relay


K2 Reverse Gear Relay K2 Reverse Gear Relay Back Up Alarm
K3 Four Wheel Drive Relay K3 Four Wheel Drive Relay
K4 K4 Start Relay
K5 Low Beam Relay K5 Low Beam Relay
K6 High Beam Relay K6 High Beam Relay
K7 Direction Selector Power Supply Relay K7 Direction Selector Power Supply Relay
K8 Horn Relay K8 Front Horn Relay
K9 Turn Indicator Relay K9 Turn Indicator Relay
K10 Flasher Relay K10 4th Gear Signaling Relay
K11 4th Gear Signaling Relay

WB140-2N WB150-2N 90-77


OTHERS ELECTRICAL
12

90-78 WB140-2N WB150-2N


Komatsu America Corp.
DataKom Publications & Training PROPOSAL FOR MANUAL OR CSS REVISION
440 North Fairway Drive
Vernon Hills, IL. 60061-8112 U.S.A.
Attn: Service Publications
Fax No. (847)-970-4186

DATE: FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY -- No.PMR

NAME OF COMPANY: CITY:


PROPOSER

STATE OR PROVINCE:

DEPARTMENT: COUNTRY:

NAME: FAX:

MANUAL DESCRIPTION: CSS PROGRAM - e.g: Lookup, Parts or Service

MANUAL OR CSS CD NO: CSS PROGRAM RELEASE VERSION:

MANUAL OR CSS CD ISSUE DATE: CSS BOOK PUBLISHER:

BOOK DESCRIPTION
MACHINE MODEL & S/N:

MANUAL SECTION/PAGE NUMBERS OR CSS REFERENCE & PAGE NUMBERS

PROBLEM:

Attach photos or sketches.


If more space is needed, use another sheet.

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

PROPFREV.FM 100903

You might also like